SINAMICS S110
Manual · 01/2011
SINAMICS
s
Manual
___________________
Preface
1
___________________
System overview
SINAMICS
S110
Manual
Mains connection and line2
___________________
side power components
3
___________________
Power Modules
4
___________________
DC link components
Motor-side power
5
___________________
components
Manual
6
___________________
CU305 Control Units
Supplementary system
components and encoder
system integration
7
___________
8
___________________
Accessories
Cabinet design and EMC for
components, Blocksize
format
9
Cooling circuit and coolant
10
___________________
properties
11
___________________
Service and maintenance
A
___________________
Appendix A
B
___________________
Appendix B
01/2011
6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and
safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of
identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Order number: 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Ⓟ 12/2010
Copyright © Siemens AG 2008,
2009, 2011.
Technical data subject to change
Preface
SINAMICS Documentation
The SINAMICS documentation is organized in the following categories:
● General documentation/catalogs
● User documentation
● Manufacturer/Service documentation
More information
Using the following link, you can find information on the topics:
● Ordering documentation/overview of documentation
● Additional links to download documents
● Using documentation online (find and search in manuals/information)
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu
Please send any questions about the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions for
improvement, corrections) to the following e-mail address:
docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com
My Documentation Manager
Using the following link, you can find information on how to create your own individual
documentation based on Siemens' content, and adapt it for your own machine
documentation:
http://www.siemens.com/mdm
Training
Using the following link, you can find information on SITRAIN - training from Siemens for
products, systems and automation engineering solutions:
http://www.siemens.com/sitrain
FAQs
You can find Frequently Asked Questions in the Service&Support pages under Product
Support:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
5
Preface
SINAMICS
You can find information on SINAMICS at:
http://www.siemens.com/sinamics
Usage phases and the available tools/documents
Table 1
Usage phase and the available tools / documents
Usage phase
Tools/documents
Orientation
SINAMICS S Sales Documentation
Planning/configuration
SIZER configuration tool
Configuration Manuals, Motors
Decision making/ordering
SINAMICS S Catalogs
Installation/assembly

SINAMICS S110 Equipment Manual
Commissioning

STARTER commissioning tool

SINAMICS S110 Getting Started

SINAMICS S110 Function Manual Drive Functions

SINAMICS S110 List Manual

SINAMICS S110 Function Manual Drive Functions

SINAMICS S110 List Manual

SINAMICS S110 Function Manual Drive Functions

SINAMICS S110 List Manual

SINAMICS S110 Equipment Manual
Usage/operation
Maintenance/service
Target group
This documentation is aimed at machine manufacturers, commissioning engineers, and
service personnel who use SINAMICS.
Benefits
This manual describes all the information, procedures and operational instructions required
for commissioning and servicing SINAMICS S110.
Manual
6
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Preface
Standard scope
The scope of the functionality described in this document can differ from the scope of the
functionality of the drive system that is actually supplied.
● Other functions not described in this documentation might be able to be executed in the
drive system. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions
with a new control or when servicing.
● Functions can be described in the documentation that are not available in a particular
product version of the drive system. The functionality of the supplied drive system should
only be taken from the ordering documentation.
● Extensions or changes made by the machine manufacturer must be documented by the
machine manufacturer.
For reasons of clarity, this documentation does not contain all of the detailed information on
all of the product types. This documentation cannot take into consideration every
conceivable type of installation, operation and service/maintenance.
Technical Support
Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided in the Internet under
Contact:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
EC Declaration of Conformity
The EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found on the Internet at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
There – as a search term – enter the number 15257461 or contact your local Siemens office.
The EC Declaration of Conformity for the Low Voltage Directive can be found on the Internet
at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
There – as a search term – enter the number 22383669.
Note
When operated in dry areas, SINAMICS S devices conform to the Low Voltage Directive
73/23/EEC or 2006/95/EEC.
Note
SINAMICS S devices fulfill EMC Directive 89/336/EEC or 2004/108/EEC in the configuration
specified in the associated EC Declaration of Conformity for EMC and when the EMC
installation guideline is implemented, Order No. 6FC5297-0AD30-0⃞P⃞.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
7
Preface
Note
The Equipment Manual describes a desired state which, if maintained, ensures the required
level of operational reliability and compliance with EMC limit values.
Should there be any deviation from the requirements in the Equipment Manual, appropriate
actions (e.g. measurements) must be taken to check/prove that the required level of
operational reliability and compliance with EMC limit values are ensured.
Spare parts
You can find spare parts on the Internet at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/16612315
Test certificates
The Safety Integrated functions of SINAMICS components are generally certified by
independent institutes. An up-to-date list of certified components is available on request from
your local Siemens office. If you have any questions relating to certifications that have not
been completed, please ask your Siemens contact.
Manual
8
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Preface
ESD information
CAUTION
Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are single components, integrated circuits or devices
that can be damaged by electrostatic fields or electrostatic discharges.
Regulations for handling ESD components:
When handling components, make sure that personnel, workplaces, and packaging are
well grounded.
Personnel may only come into contact with electronic components, if
 They are grounded with an ESD wrist band, or
 They are in ESD areas with conductive flooring, ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps.
Electronic boards should only be touched if absolutely necessary. They must only be
handled on the front panel or, in the case of printed circuit boards, at the edge.
Electronic boards must not come into contact with plastics or items of clothing containing
synthetic fibers.
Boards must only be placed on conductive surfaces (work surfaces with ESD surface,
conductive ESD foam, ESD packing bag, ESD transport container).
Electronic boards may not be placed near display units, monitors, or televisions (minimum
distance from the screen > 10 cm).
Measurements must only be taken on boards when the measuring instrument is grounded
(via protective conductors, for example) or the measuring probe is briefly discharged before
measurements are taken with an isolated measuring device (for example, touching a bare
metal housing).
DANGER
Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields (EMF) that occur during operation can pose
a danger to persons who are present in the direct vicinity of the product - especially
persons with pacemakers, implants, or similar devices.
The relevant directives and standards must be observed by the machine/plant operators
and people present in the vicinity of the product. These are, for example, EMF Directive
2004/40/EEC and standards EN 12198-1 to -3 in the European Economic Area (EEA) and,
in Germany, the accident prevention regulation BGV 11 and the associated rule BGR 11
"Electromagnetic fields" from the German Employer's Liability Insurance Association.
These state that a hazard analysis must drawn up for every workplace, from which
measures for reducing dangers and their impact on persons are derived and applied, and
exposure and danger zones are defined and observed.
The relevant safety notes in each chapter must be observed.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
9
Preface
General safety guidelines
DANGER
Commissioning is absolutely prohibited until it has been completely ensured that the
machine in which the components described here are to be installed is in full compliance
with the provisions of the EC Machinery Directive.
Only appropriately qualified personnel may install, commission, and maintain SINAMICS S
devices.
The personnel must take into account the information provided in the technical customer
documentation for the product, and be familiar with and observe the specified danger and
warning notices.
Operational electrical equipment and motors have parts and components which are at
hazardous voltage levels, that if touched, can result in severe bodily injury or death.
All work on the electrical system must be carried out when the system has been
disconnected from the power supply.
In combination with the drive system, the motors are generally approved for operation on
TN and TT systems with grounded neutral and on IT systems.
In operation on IT systems, the occurrence of a first fault between an active part and
ground must be signaled by a monitoring device. In accordance with IEC 60364-4-41 it is
recommended that the first fault should be eliminated as quickly as practically possible.
In networks with a grounded external conductor, an isolating transformer with grounded
neutral (secondary side) must be connected between the supply and the drive system to
protect the motor insulation from excessive stress. The majority of TT systems have a
grounded external conductor, so in this case an isolating transformer must be used.
DANGER
Correct and safe operation of SINAMICS S drive units assumes correct transportation in
the transportation packaging, correct long-term storage in the transport packaging, setup
and installation, as well as careful operation and maintenance.
The details in the Catalogs and proposals also apply to the design of special equipment
versions.
In addition to the danger and warning information provided in the technical customer
documentation, the applicable national, local, and system-specific regulations and
requirements must be taken into account.
According to EN 61800-5-1 and UL 508, only safely isolated protective extra low voltages
may be connected to any of the connections or terminals on the electronics modules.
DANGER
Using protection against direct contact via DVC A (PELV) is only permissible in areas with
equipotential bonding and in dry rooms indoors. If these conditions are not met, other
protective measures with regard to electric shock must be taken, e.g. touch protection.
Manual
10
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Preface
DANGER
As part of routine tests, SINAMICS S components will undergo a voltage test in accordance
with EN 61800-5-1. Before the voltage test is performed on the electrical equipment of
machines acc. to EN 60204-1, Section 18.4, all connectors of SINAMICS S equipment must
be disconnected/unplugged to prevent the equipment from being damaged.
Motors should be connected up in accordance with the circuit diagram supplied with the
motor (refer to the connection examples for Power Modules). They must not be connected
directly to the three-phase supply because this will damage them.
WARNING
Operating the equipment in the immediate vicinity (< 1.8 m) of cell phones with a
transmitter power of > 1 W may cause the equipment to malfunction.
Explanation of symbols
The symbols are in accordance with IEC 617-2.
Table 2
Symbols
Symbol
Meaning
Protective earth (PE)
Ground (e.g. M 24 V)
Functional ground
Equipotential bonding
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
11
Preface
Residual risks
Residual risks of power drive systems
The control and drive components of a power drive system (PDS) are approved for industrial
and commercial use in industrial line supplies. Their use in public line supplies requires a
different configuration and/or additional measures.
These components may only be operated in closed housings or in higher-level control
cabinets with protective covers that are closed, and when all of the protective devices are
used.
These components may only be handled by qualified and trained technical personnel who
are knowledgeable and observe all of the safety information and instructions on the
components and in the associated technical user documentation.
When carrying out a risk assessment of a machine in accordance with the EU Machinery
Directive, the machine manufacturer must consider the following residual risks associated
with the control and drive components of a power drive system (PDS).
1. Unintentional movements of driven machine components during commissioning,
operation, maintenance, and repairs caused by, for example:
– Hardware defects and/or software errors in the sensors, controllers, actuators, and
connection technology
– Response times of the controller and drive
– Operating and/or ambient conditions not within the scope of the specification
– Condensation / conductive contamination
– Parameterization, programming, cabling, and installation errors
– Use of radio devices / cellular phones in the immediate vicinity of the controller
– External influences / damage
2. Exceptional temperatures as well as emissions of light, noise, particles, or gas caused by,
for example:
– Component malfunctions
– Software errors
– Operating and/or ambient conditions not within the scope of the specification
– External influences / damage
3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example:
– Component malfunctions
– Influence of electrostatic charging
– Induction of voltages in moving motors
– Operating and/or ambient conditions not within the scope of the specification
– Condensation / conductive contamination
– External influences / damage
Manual
12
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Preface
4. Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a
risk to people with a pacemaker, implants or metal replacement joints, etc. if they are too
close.
5. Release of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the
system and/or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly.
Note
Functional safety of SINAMICS components
The components must be protected against conductive contamination (e.g. by installing them
in a cabinet with degree of protection IP54B to EN 60529).
Assuming that conductive contamination at the installation site can definitely be excluded, a
lower degree of cabinet protection may be permitted.
For more information about residual risks of the components in a power drive system, see
the relevant chapters in the technical user documentation.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
13
Preface
Manual
14
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 5
1
2
3
System overview...................................................................................................................................... 21
1.1
Field of application .......................................................................................................................21
1.2
Platform concept and Totally Integrated Automation...................................................................23
1.3
Overview of SINAMICS S110 ......................................................................................................24
1.4
System data .................................................................................................................................25
1.5
Derating as a function of the installation altitude and ambient temperature................................27
1.6
Standards.....................................................................................................................................28
Mains connection and line-side power components................................................................................. 31
2.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................31
2.2
Information on the disconnector unit............................................................................................33
2.3
Overcurrent protection by means of line fuses and circuit breakers............................................34
2.4
Using residual-current devices.....................................................................................................35
2.5
Overvoltage protection.................................................................................................................36
2.6
Line contactors.............................................................................................................................37
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
Line filter.......................................................................................................................................38
Description ...................................................................................................................................38
Safety information ........................................................................................................................39
Dimension drawing ......................................................................................................................40
Installation ....................................................................................................................................41
Technical data, Blocksize line filter ..............................................................................................42
2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
2.8.6
Line reactors ................................................................................................................................43
Description ...................................................................................................................................43
Safety information ........................................................................................................................43
Dimension drawings.....................................................................................................................44
Installation ....................................................................................................................................46
Electrical Connection ...................................................................................................................54
Technical data, Blocksize ............................................................................................................55
2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.9.4
Line connection variants ..............................................................................................................57
Methods of line connection ..........................................................................................................57
Operation of the Line Connection Components on the Supply Network .....................................58
Operation of the Line Connection Components via an Autotransformer .....................................60
Operation of the Line Connection Components via an Isolating Transformer.............................61
Power Modules........................................................................................................................................ 63
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
Power Modules Blocksize (PM340) .............................................................................................63
Description ...................................................................................................................................63
Safety information ........................................................................................................................65
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
15
Table of contents
4
3.1.3
3.1.3.1
3.1.3.2
3.1.3.3
3.1.3.4
3.1.3.5
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.6.1
3.1.6.2
3.1.6.3
3.1.7
3.1.7.1
3.1.7.2
3.1.7.3
Interface description.................................................................................................................... 68
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 68
Line supply connection................................................................................................................ 75
Motor connection......................................................................................................................... 75
Braking resistor and DC link connection ..................................................................................... 76
Connection to the option module, brake control ......................................................................... 76
Example connections .................................................................................................................. 77
Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................... 79
Mounting...................................................................................................................................... 86
Drilling patterns ........................................................................................................................... 86
Mounting dimensions and tightening torques ............................................................................. 88
Access to the power supply terminals and motor terminals........................................................ 89
Technical data............................................................................................................................. 90
Power Modules Blocksize, 1-ph. AC........................................................................................... 90
Characteristics ............................................................................................................................ 97
Current derating depending on the pulse frequency................................................................. 102
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.3.1
3.2.3.2
3.2.3.3
3.2.3.4
3.2.3.5
3.2.3.6
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.5.1
3.2.5.2
3.2.5.3
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.8.1
Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340) ................................................................... 104
Description ................................................................................................................................ 104
Safety information ..................................................................................................................... 105
Interface description.................................................................................................................. 108
Overview ................................................................................................................................... 108
Connection example ................................................................................................................. 109
Line supply connection.............................................................................................................. 110
Braking resistor and DC link connection ................................................................................... 111
Motor connection....................................................................................................................... 111
Connection to the option module, brake control ....................................................................... 111
Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 112
Installation ................................................................................................................................. 114
Drilling patterns ......................................................................................................................... 115
Installation ................................................................................................................................. 116
Access to the power supply terminals and motor terminals...................................................... 117
Connection to the cooling circuit ............................................................................................... 118
Commissioning.......................................................................................................................... 118
Technical data........................................................................................................................... 119
Characteristics .......................................................................................................................... 122
DC link components............................................................................................................................... 127
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
5
Braking resistors ....................................................................................................................... 127
Description ................................................................................................................................ 127
Safety information ..................................................................................................................... 127
Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 129
Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 131
Technical data........................................................................................................................... 132
Motor-side power components............................................................................................................... 135
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
Motor reactors (blocksize)......................................................................................................... 135
Description ................................................................................................................................ 135
Safety information ..................................................................................................................... 135
Dimension drawings.................................................................................................................. 136
Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 141
Electrical connection ................................................................................................................. 147
Technical data........................................................................................................................... 148
Manual
16
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Table of contents
6
7
CU305 Control Units.............................................................................................................................. 151
6.1
Description .................................................................................................................................151
6.2
Safety information ......................................................................................................................153
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.1.1
6.3.1.2
6.3.2
6.3.2.1
6.3.2.2
6.3.2.3
6.3.3
6.3.3.1
6.3.3.2
6.3.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.4.1
6.3.4.2
6.3.4.3
6.3.4.4
6.3.4.5
6.3.4.6
6.3.4.7
6.3.4.8
6.3.4.9
6.3.4.10
6.3.4.11
Interfaces ...................................................................................................................................154
CU305 PN (PROFINET) ............................................................................................................154
Overview CU305 PN..................................................................................................................154
X150 P1 / P2 PROFINET...........................................................................................................155
CU305 DP (PROFIBUS) ............................................................................................................156
Overview CU305 DP..................................................................................................................156
X126 PROFIBUS/USS interface ................................................................................................157
PROFIBUS/USS address switch ...............................................................................................158
CU305 CAN ...............................................................................................................................159
Overview CU305 CAN ...............................................................................................................159
X126 CAN interface ...................................................................................................................160
S100 DIP switch.........................................................................................................................160
Common interfaces for CU305 PN/DP/CAN..............................................................................161
X100 DRIVE-CLiQ interface ......................................................................................................161
Electronics power supply X124..................................................................................................161
X130 failsafe digital inputs .........................................................................................................162
X131 failsafe digital inputs/outputs ............................................................................................163
X132 Digital inputs/outputs, analog input ..................................................................................164
X133 digital inputs, motor temperature sensor input .................................................................165
X23 HTL/TTL/SSI encoder interface..........................................................................................166
Pulse/direction interface.............................................................................................................169
X22 serial interface (RS232)......................................................................................................171
X520/521/522 measuring sockets..............................................................................................171
Memory card slot .......................................................................................................................172
6.4
Connection examples ................................................................................................................173
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
Meaning of LEDs .......................................................................................................................177
Behavior of the LEDs during booting .........................................................................................178
Behavior of the LEDs in the operating state ..............................................................................179
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................181
Dimension drawing, CU305 PN .................................................................................................181
Dimension drawing CU305 DP/CAN .........................................................................................182
6.7
Mounting ....................................................................................................................................183
6.8
Technical data............................................................................................................................184
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration ................................................... 185
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
Basic Operator Panel BOP20 ....................................................................................................185
Description .................................................................................................................................185
Interface description...................................................................................................................185
Installation ..................................................................................................................................188
7.2
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
7.2.3.1
7.2.3.2
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10 .................................................................................190
Description .................................................................................................................................190
Safety information ......................................................................................................................190
Interface description...................................................................................................................191
Overview ....................................................................................................................................191
DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500 ......................................................................................................192
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
17
Table of contents
8
7.2.3.3
7.2.3.4
7.2.4
7.2.5
7.2.6
7.2.7
X520 encoder system interface ................................................................................................ 192
X524 Electronics power supply................................................................................................. 193
Meaning of the LED .................................................................................................................. 194
Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 195
Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 195
Technical data........................................................................................................................... 197
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.3.1
7.3.3.2
7.3.3.3
7.3.3.4
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
7.3.7
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20 ................................................................................ 199
Description ................................................................................................................................ 199
Safety information ..................................................................................................................... 199
Interface description.................................................................................................................. 200
Overview ................................................................................................................................... 200
DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500...................................................................................................... 201
X520 encoder system interface ................................................................................................ 201
Electronics power supply X524................................................................................................. 202
Meaning of the LED .................................................................................................................. 203
Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 204
Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 204
Technical data........................................................................................................................... 206
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.3.1
7.4.3.2
7.4.3.3
7.4.3.4
7.4.3.5
7.4.4
7.4.5
7.4.6
7.4.7
7.4.8
7.4.9
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30 ................................................................................ 207
Description ................................................................................................................................ 207
Safety information ..................................................................................................................... 207
Interface description.................................................................................................................. 208
Overview ................................................................................................................................... 208
DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500...................................................................................................... 209
X520 encoder system interface ................................................................................................ 209
X521 / X531 alternative encoder system interface ................................................................... 211
X524 Electronics power supply................................................................................................. 212
Connection examples................................................................................................................ 213
Meaning of LEDs....................................................................................................................... 215
Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 216
Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 216
Protective conductor connection and shield support ................................................................ 218
Technical Specifications............................................................................................................ 219
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.2.1
7.5.2.2
7.5.2.3
7.5.2.4
7.5.2.5
7.5.2.6
Option modules, braking signal................................................................................................. 223
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 223
Safe Brake Relay ...................................................................................................................... 223
Safety Information ..................................................................................................................... 224
Interface description.................................................................................................................. 224
Connection example ................................................................................................................. 226
Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 227
Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 228
Technical data........................................................................................................................... 230
Accessories ........................................................................................................................................... 231
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.3.1
8.1.4
8.1.5
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland ....................................................................................................... 231
Description ................................................................................................................................ 231
Safety Information ..................................................................................................................... 231
Interface description.................................................................................................................. 232
Overview ................................................................................................................................... 232
Dimension drawing.................................................................................................................... 232
Installation ................................................................................................................................. 233
Manual
18
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Table of contents
9
10
8.1.6
Technical data............................................................................................................................234
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.3.1
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
DRIVE-CLiQ coupling ................................................................................................................235
Description .................................................................................................................................235
Safety information ......................................................................................................................235
Interface description...................................................................................................................235
Overview ....................................................................................................................................235
Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................236
Installation ..................................................................................................................................237
Technical data............................................................................................................................237
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.2.1
8.3.2.2
8.3.3
8.3.3.1
8.3.3.2
Screening Kit..............................................................................................................................238
Description .................................................................................................................................238
Dimension drawings...................................................................................................................239
Screening Kits ............................................................................................................................239
Blocksize Power Modules with Screening Kits ..........................................................................241
Mounting ....................................................................................................................................245
Overview ....................................................................................................................................245
Blocksize Liquid Cooled Power Modules...................................................................................249
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format ................................................................. 251
9.1
General ......................................................................................................................................251
9.2
Safety information ......................................................................................................................252
9.3
Notes on electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)..........................................................................254
9.4
Cable Shielding and Routing .....................................................................................................255
9.5
9.5.1
9.5.2
9.5.3
9.5.4
9.5.5
24 V DC Supply Voltage ............................................................................................................257
General ......................................................................................................................................257
Overcurrent Protection...............................................................................................................258
Overvoltage protection...............................................................................................................259
Typical 24 V current consumption of the components...............................................................260
Selecting power supply units .....................................................................................................261
9.6
9.6.1
9.6.2
Arrangement of components and equipment.............................................................................262
General ......................................................................................................................................262
Mounting ....................................................................................................................................262
9.7
Protective connection and equipotential bonding ......................................................................264
9.8
9.8.1
9.8.2
9.8.3
9.8.3.1
9.8.3.2
9.8.3.3
9.8.3.4
Notes on electrical cabinet cooling ............................................................................................266
General ......................................................................................................................................266
Ventilation ..................................................................................................................................267
Power loss of components during rated operation ....................................................................269
General information ...................................................................................................................269
Power loss for Control Units and Sensor Modules ....................................................................269
Power loss for line reactors and line filters ................................................................................270
Power loss for Power Modules ..................................................................................................271
Cooling circuit and coolant properties .................................................................................................... 273
10.1
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
Cooling circuit requirements ......................................................................................................273
Technical cooling circuits ...........................................................................................................273
Cooling system requirements ....................................................................................................273
Cooling circuit configuration.......................................................................................................275
Installation ..................................................................................................................................279
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
19
Table of contents
11
A
10.1.5
10.1.6
Preventing cavitation................................................................................................................. 280
Commissioning.......................................................................................................................... 280
10.2
10.2.1
10.2.2
10.2.3
10.2.4
Coolant requirements................................................................................................................ 281
Coolant properties..................................................................................................................... 281
Anti-corrosion additives (inhibitors)........................................................................................... 282
Anti-freeze additives.................................................................................................................. 282
Biocide additives (only if required) ............................................................................................ 283
10.3
Anti-condensation measures..................................................................................................... 284
10.4
Equipotential bonding................................................................................................................ 285
Service and maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 287
11.1
Safety information ..................................................................................................................... 287
11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
Service and maintenance for components, Blocksize format ................................................... 288
Replacing hardware components ............................................................................................. 288
Replacing the fan ...................................................................................................................... 288
11.3
Forming the DC link capacitors................................................................................................. 293
11.4
Spare parts................................................................................................................................ 297
11.5
Recycling and disposal ............................................................................................................. 298
Appendix A ............................................................................................................................................ 299
A.1
B
Spring-loaded terminals/screw terminal.................................................................................... 299
Appendix B ............................................................................................................................................ 301
B.1
List of abbreviations .................................................................................................................. 301
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 313
Manual
20
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
1
System overview
1.1
Field of application
SINAMICS is the family of drives from Siemens designed for machine and plant engineering
applications. SINAMICS offers solutions for all drive tasks:
● Simple pump and fan applications in the process industry.
● Complex individual drives in centrifuges, presses, extruders, elevators, as well as
conveyor and transport systems.
● Drive line-ups in textile, plastic film, and paper machines, as well as in rolling mill plants.
● High precision servo drives in the manufacture of wind turbines
● Highly dynamic servo drives for machine tools, as well as packaging and printing
machines.
Depending on the application, the SINAMICS range offers the ideal version for any drive task.
0L[HUVPLOOV
3ODVWLF
&RQYHUWLQJ
0DFKLQHWRROV
3XPSVIDQV
&RPSUHVVRUV
7H[WLOHV
3DFNDJLQJ
&RQYH\RUV\VWHPV
:RRGZRUNLQJ
3ULQWLQJPDFKLQHV
Figure 1-1
5HQHZDEOHHQHUJ\
SINAMICS applications
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
21
System overview
1.1 Field of application
Depending on the application, the SINAMICS range offers the ideal variant for any drive
task.
● SINAMICS G is designed for standard applications with induction motors. These
applications have less stringent requirements regarding the dynamic performance of the
motor speed.
● SINAMICS S handles complex drive tasks with synchronous/induction motors and fulfills
stringent requirements regarding
– the dynamic performance and accuracy
– the integration of extensive technical functions in the drive control system
● SINAMICS DC MASTER is the DC drive belonging to the SINAMICS family. As a result of
its standard expandability, it addresses both basic as well as demanding drive
applications and in complementary markets.
Manual
22
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
System overview
1.2 Platform concept and Totally Integrated Automation
1.2
Platform concept and Totally Integrated Automation
All SINAMICS versions are based on a platform concept. Joint hardware and software
components, as well as standardized tools for design, configuration, and commissioning
tasks ensure high-level integration across all components. SINAMICS handles a wide variety
of drive tasks with no system gaps. The different SINAMICS versions can be easily
combined with each other.
Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) with SINAMICS S110
SINAMICS is one of the core components of TIA alongside SIMATIC, SIMOTION and
SINUMERIK. The STARTER commissioning tool is an integral element of the TIA platform.
It is thus possible to parameterize, program and commission all components in the
automation system using a standardized engineering platform and without any gaps.
The system-wide data management functions ensure consistent data and simplify archiving
of the entire plant project.
SINAMICS S110 supports PROFIBUS DP, the standard field bus of the TIA system.
It provides a high-performance, system-wide communication network which links all
automation components: HMI, controls, drives and I/O devices.
SINAMICS S110 is also available with a PROFINET interface. This Ethernet-based bus
allows the rapid exchange of control data via PROFINET IO.
6,027,21
6,180(5,.
6,0$7,&
6,1$0,&6
,QGXFWLRQPRWRUV
Figure 1-2
'&PRWRUV
6\QFKURQRXVPRWRUV
SINAMICS as part of the Siemens modular automation system
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
23
System overview
1.3 Overview of SINAMICS S110
1.3
Overview of SINAMICS S110
SINAMICS S110 is the "simple servo" in the range of SINAMICS AC Drives. As a modular
drive system for single axes in "servo" control mode, it is primarily used for simple
positioning tasks in a wide range of industrial applications.
Typical areas of application for positioning, setting up and referencing include:
● Simple infeed tasks (e.g. rotary indexing tables)
● Handling technology, robotics
● Pick & place tasks
● Printing and paper machines
● Packaging machines
As a combination of a power unit (Power Module) and a Control Unit (CU) the SINAMICS
S110 forms a single-motor drive in a compact format for machinery and plant construction.
SIZER, a high-performance engineering tool, makes it easier to choose and determine the
optimum drive configuration. The drive can be simply commissioned a user-friendly fashion
using the STARTER commissioning tool.
SINAMICS S110 can be used to operate synchronous and induction motors. Direct drives,
such as linear and torque motors, can only be operated with SINAMICS S120.
Manual
24
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
System overview
1.4 System data
1.4
Table 1- 1
System data
General technical data
Electrical data
Line supply voltage:
Blocksize format units
1-ph. 200 V to 240 V AC ±10 %
3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC ±10 %
Rated pulse frequency:
Blocksize format units
4 kHz
Line frequency
47 Hz to 63 Hz
Output voltage:
Blocksize format units
0 V to rated line supply voltage at 3-ph. 380 V up to 480 V AC units,
0 V to 0.78 of the line supply voltage for 1-ph. 200 V to 240 V AC units.
Electronics power supply
24 V DC -15/+20 %*), safety extra-low voltage DVC A (PELV)
Short-circuit current rating SCCR in accordance
with UL508C (up to 600 V)

1.1 kW – 447 kW: 65 kA

448 kW – 671 kW: 84 kA

672 kW – 1193 kW: 170 kA

≥ 1194 kW: 200 kA
Radio interference suppression
acc. to EN 61800-3
Category C3 (option)
Category C2 (option)
for systems implemented in conformance with the documentation
Overvoltage category
III acc. to EN 60664-1
Degree of pollution
2 acc. to 60664-1
*) If a motor holding brake is used, restricted voltage tolerances (±10%) may have to be taken into account.
Environmental conditions
Degree of protection
IP20 or IPXXB acc. to EN 60529, open type acc. to UL 508
Protective class line supply circuits
Protective class electronic circuits
I (with protective conductor connection)
III (safety extra-low voltage DVC A /PELV) acc. to EN 61800-5-1
Type of cooling
Internal air cooling,
power units with forced air cooling using an integrated fan
Permissible cooling medium temperature (air)
and installation altitude in operation
0 °C to +40 °C and an installation altitude of up to 1,000 m without
derating, >40 °C to 55 °C, see the characteristic for current derating.
Installation altitude >1,000 m and up to 4,000 m, see the characteristic
for current derating or reduction of the ambient temperature by 3.5 K
per 500 m.
Chemically active substances

Long-term storage in the transport packaging

Transport in the transport packaging

Operation
Class 1C2 to EN 60721-3-1
Class 2C2 to EN 60721-3-2
Class 3C2 to EN 60721-3-3
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
25
System overview
1.4 System data
Biological environmental conditions:

Storage in the transport packaging

Transport in the transport packaging

Operation
Class 1B1 to EN 60721-3-1
Class 2B1 to EN 60721-3-2
Class 3B1 to EN 60721-3-3
Vibratory load

Long-term storage in the transport packaging

Transport in the transport packaging

Operation
Class 1M2 acc. to EN 60721-3-1
Class 2M3 acc. to EN 60721-3-2
Test values: 10 Hz to 58 Hz 0.075 mm; 58 Hz to 200 Hz 1 g
Shock load

Long-term storage in the transport packaging

Transport in the transport packaging

Operation
Class 1M2 acc. to EN 60721-3-1
Class 2M3 acc. to EN 60721-3-2
Test values: 15 g / 11 ms
Climatic ambient conditions

Long-term storage in the transport packaging

Transport in the transport packaging

Operation
Class 1K4 acc. to EN 60721-3-1
Temperature -25 °C to +55 °C
Class 2K4 acc. to EN 60721-3-2
Temperature -40 °C to +70 °C
Class 3K3 acc. to EN 60721-3-3
Temperature +0 °C to +40 °C
Relative humidity 5% to 90%
≤ 60%, in environments which contain corrosive gases and/or dust.
Oil mist, saline fog, ice, condensation, dripping water, spray water, and
splashes or jets of water are not permissible.
Certificates
Declarations of Conformity
CE (Low-Voltage and EMC Directive)
Approvals
cULus
Manual
26
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
System overview
1.5 Derating as a function of the installation altitude and ambient temperature
1.5
Derating as a function of the installation altitude and ambient
temperature
The Power Modules Blocksize format and Blocksize Liquid Cooled are designed for
operation at an ambient temperature of 40 °C, installation altitudes up to 1000 m above sea
level and the relevant specified pulse frequency.
The air pressure and therefore air density drop at altitudes above sea level. At these
altitudes, the same quantity of air does not have the same cooling effect and the air gap
between two electrical conductors can only insulate a lower voltage. Typical values for air
pressure are summarized in the table below:
Table 1- 2
Air pressure for various installation altitudes
Installation altitude 0
above sea level in
[m]
2000
3000
4000
5000
Air pressure in
mbar [kPa]
80
70
62
54
100
The output current must be reduced if the modules are operated at ambient temperatures
above 40 °C see derating characteristics of the individual modules). Ambient temperatures
above 55 °C are not permissible.
The air gaps inside the devices can insulate surge voltages of surge voltage category III in
accordance with EN 60664-1 up to an installation altitude of 2000 m. At installation altitudes
above 2000 m, the Power Modules must be connected via an isolating transformer. The
isolating transformer reduces surge voltages of surge voltage category III in power supplies
to surge voltages of surge category II at the power terminals of the Power Modules and
thereby conforms to the permissible voltage values for air gaps inside the unit The design
the secondary line supply system must be as follows:
● TN system with grounded star point (no grounded outer conductor)
● IT system
A reduction of the line supply voltage phase-phase is not necessary.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
27
System overview
1.6 Standards
1.6
Standards
Note
The standards listed in the table below are non-binding and do not in any way claim to be
complete. The standards listed do not represent a guaranteed property of the product.
Only the statements made in the Declaration of Conformity shall be deemed binding.
Table 1- 3
Fundamental, application-relevant standards in succession: EN, IEC/ISO, DIN, VDE
Standards*
Title
EN 1037
ISO 14118
DIN EN 1037
Safety of machinery; avoiding unexpected starting
EN ISO 9001
ISO 9001
DIN EN ISO 9001
Quality management systems - requirements
EN ISO 12100-x
ISO 12100-x
DIN EN ISO 12100-x
Safety of Machinery; General Design Guidelines;
Part 1: Basic terminology, methodology
Part 2: Technical Principles and Specifications
EN ISO 13849-x
ISO 13849-x
DIN EN ISO 13849-x
Safety of machinery; safety-related parts of control systems;
Part 1: General basic design principles
Part 2: Validation
EN ISO 14121-1
ISO 14121-1
DIN EN ISO 14121-1
Safety of Machinery - Risk Assessment;
Part 1: Guidelines
EN 55011
CISPR 11
DIN EN 55011
VDE 0875-11
Industrial, scientific and medical high-frequency devices (ISM devices) radio interference - limit values and measuring techniques
EN 60146-1-1
IEC 60146-1-1
DIN EN 60146-1-1
VDE 0558-11
Semiconductor converters; general requirements and line-commutated converters;
Part 1-1: Defining the basic requirements
EN 60204-1
IEC 60204-1
DIN EN 60204-1
VDE 0113-1
Electrical equipment of machines;
Part 1: General definitions
EN 60228
IEC 60228
DIN EN 60228
VDE0295
Conductors for cables and insulated leads
EN 60269-1
IEC 60269-1
DIN EN 60269-1
VDE 0636-1
Low-voltage fuses;
Part 1: General requirements
Manual
28
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
System overview
1.6 Standards
Standards*
Title
IEC 60287-1 to -3
Cables - Calculation of the current carrying capacity
Part 1: Current carrying capacity equations (100 % load factor) and calculating the losses
Part 2: Thermal resistance Part 3: Main sections for operating conditions
HD 60364-x-x
IEC 60364-x-x
DIN VDE 0100-x-x
VDE 0100-x-x
Erection of power installations with nominal voltages up to 1000 V;
Part 200: Definitions
Part 410: Protection for safety, protection against electric shock
Part 420: Protection for safety, protection against thermal effects
Part 430: Protection of cables and conductors for over-current
Part 450: Protection for safety, protection against undervoltage
Part 470: Protection for safety; use of protection for safety
Part 5xx: Selecting and erecting electrical equipment
Part 520: Wiring systems
Part 540: Earthing, protective conductor, potential bonding conductor
Part 560: Electrical equipment for safety purposes
EN 60439
IEC 60439
DIN EN 60439
VDE 0660-500
Low-voltage switchgear assemblies;
Part 1: Type-tested and partially type-tested assemblies
EN 60529
IEC 60529
DIN EN 60529
VDE 0470-1
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
EN 60721-3-x
IEC 60721-3-x
DIN EN 60721-3-x
Classification of environmental conditions
Part 3-0: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; Introduction
Part 3-1: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; Long-term storage
Part 3-2: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; Transport
Part 3-3: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; stationary use, weather
protected
EN 60947-x-x
IEC 60947 -x-x
DIN EN 60947-x-x
VDE 0660-x
Low-voltage switchgear
EN 61000-6-x
IEC 61000-6-x
DIN EN 61000-6-x
VDE 0839-6-x
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Part 6-1: Generic standard; Immunity for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments
Part 6-2: Generic standards; Immunity for industrial environments
Part 6-3: Generic standards; Generic standard emission for residential, commercial and lightindustrial environments
Part 6-4: Generic standards; Generic standard noise emission for industrial environments
EN 61140
IEC 61140
DIN EN 61140
VDE 0140-1
Protection against electric shock; Common aspects for installation and equipment
EN 61800-2
IEC 61800-2
DIN EN 61800-2
VDE 0160-102
Adjustable-speed electrical power drive systems;
Part 2: General requirements - Rating specifications for low-voltage adjustable frequency a.c.
power drive systems
EN 61800-3
IEC 61800-3
DIN EN 61800-3
VDE 0160-103
Adjustable-speed electrical power drive systems;
Part 3: EMC - Requirements and specific test methods
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
29
System overview
1.6 Standards
Standards*
Title
EN 61800-5-x
IEC 61800-5-x
DIN EN 61800-5-x
VDE 0160-105-x
Adjustable-speed electrical power drive systems;
Part 5: Safety requirements;
Main section 1: Electrical, thermal and energy requirements
Main section 2: Functional safety requirements
EN 62061
IEC 62061
DIN EN 62061
VDE 0113-50
Safety of machinery;
Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control
systems
UL 50
CSA C22.2 No. 94.1
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
UL 508
CSA C22.2 No. 142
Industrial Control Equipment
Process Control Equipment
UL 508C
CSA C22.2 No. 14
Power Conversion Equipment
Industrial Control Equipment
* The technical requirements in the standards listed are not necessarily identical.
Manual
30
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.1
Introduction
The following line-side components should be used to connect a SINAMICS Blocksize drive
line-up to the supply network:
● Line disconnector
● Overcurrent protection device (line fuse or circuit breaker)
● Line contactor (this is required for galvanic isolation)
● Line filter (optional for Power Module PM340, frame size FSA)
● Line reactor (optional).
The possible supply voltages for the drive line-up are
● 1-ph. 200 V to 1-ph. 240 V AC ± 10%
● 3-ph. 380 V to 3-ph. 480 V AC ± 10%
The following line reactor variants are available:
● 3 versions for frame sizes FSA - FSC (chassis)
● 5 versions for frame sizes FSD - FSF (3 chassis and 2 standalone)
The following line filter variants are available:
● Integrated
● External
– Base
– Standalone
/
/
/
7KUHHSKDVH
&RQWDFWRU
2SWLRQDO
OLQHUHDFWRU
2SWLRQDO
OLQHILOWHU
/
8
/
9
0RWRU
/ :
3(
)XVH
3(
Figure 2-1
3RZHU0RGXOH
%ORFNVL]H
3(
Example of a line connection for Power Modules blocksize with no integrated line filter
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
31
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.1 Introduction
Note
Compliance with limit values for interference voltage under Category C2 acc. to EN 61800-3
can only be assured if a line filter is used.
CAUTION
The following can occur if line reactors/line filters are used, which have not been approved
for SINAMICS by SIEMENS:
- the Power Modules could be damaged/destroyed.
- Line reactions can occur that can damage or interfere with other loads powered from the
same network.
CAUTION
The Power Modules in blocksize format with line filters are only suitable for direct
connection to TN line supplies.
Manual
32
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.2 Information on the disconnector unit
2.2
Information on the disconnector unit
A disconnector unit is required for disconnecting the drive line-up from the supply system
correctly. The disconnector unit of the machine's electrical equipment can be used for this
purpose. The disconnector unit must be selected in compliance with the requirements of the
internationally binding standard relating to the electrical equipment of machines EN 60204-1,
Section 5.3. The relevant technical specifications and any other loads connected to the
electrical equipment must be taken into account when making your selection.
The accessories required for the line disconnecting device must be selected from the
manufacturer catalogs. Refer also to catalogs PM21 and NC61.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
33
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.3 Overcurrent protection by means of line fuses and circuit breakers
2.3
Overcurrent protection by means of line fuses and circuit breakers
Line fuses or, preferably, circuit breakers should be used for line/overcurrent protection in
order to limit the damage sustained by the Power Module if a fault occurs. LV HRC, D, and
DO-type line fuses with a gL characteristic or suitable circuit breakers can be used for this
purpose.
DANGER
As a general rule, the higher loop impedance of TT systems means they are not suitable for
tripping the installed overcurrent protection devices within the prescribed period should an
insulation fault occur. If TT systems are used, residual-current-operated circuit breakers
(refer to the chapter titled "Residual-current-operated circuit breakers (RCD)") should
ideally be used in addition to the overcurrent protection devices.
WARNING
It is not permissible to overdimension fuses as this can result in significant levels of danger
and also faults.
NOTICE
Fuses that can operate across the maximum cable length within a circuit must be rated in
accordance with the requirements for:
1. Short-circuit protection (IEC 60364-4-43 and -5-52, EN 60204-1, and EN 61800-5-1)
2. The maximum permissible break time for protection against electric shock in the event
of indirect contact (IEC 60364-4-41 and -4–43, EN 61800-5-1, and EN 60204-1)
3. The maximum permissible voltage drop during operation
The maximum cable length depends primarily on the cable cross-section, material, and
insulation, as well as the type and size of the upstream overcurrent protection device.
The minimum value, which is derived from the three requirements, usually has to be strictly
observed. This means that the fuses must be designed in such a way that, if a fault occurs,
the line fuses trip after 0.4 s with mobile equipment and after 5 s with stationary equipment.
Note
The devices can be connected to line supplies up to 480 VAC, which can supply a maximum
of 36 kA symmetrical ("uninfluenced current" acc. to EN 60269-1).
For further information: See catalog PM 21.
Manual
34
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.4 Using residual-current devices
2.4
Using residual-current devices
Selectively tripping, AC/DC-sensitive residual-current devices (type B) can be used in
addition to the overcurrent protection devices.
NOTICE
Residual-current devices have to be installed if the power supply conditions in terms of
short-circuit power and loop impedance at the infeed point are not such that the installed
overcurrent protection devices will trip within the prescribed period if a fault occurs. Since
TT systems do not generally meet this requirement, residual-current devices must always
be installed for this type of system.
Residual-current-operated circuit breakers (RCD)
Residual-current-operated circuit breakers (RCD) prevent an excessively high touch current
being maintained.
DANGER
Residual-current-operated circuit breakers alone are not permissible to provide protection
against direct and indirect contact.
When using residual-current-operated circuit breakers, it should be noted that
● It is only permissible to use a delayed tripping, selective AC/DC-sensitive residualcurrent-operated circuit breaker, type B.
● The max. permitted grounding resistance of the "selective protective device" must be
observed (83 Ω max. for residual-current devices with 0.3 A rated differential current).
● Accessible parts of the Power Drive System and the machine must be connected to the
system's protective ground conductor.
● The shielded motor cable must not be longer than 50 m.
● A separate residual-current device must be used for each Power Module.
● Only one residual-current device may be connected in series (cascading is not
permitted).
● Switching elements (disconnector units, contactors) for connecting and disconnecting the
Power Drive System have a max. 35 ms delay time time between the closing/opening of
the individual main contacts.
If no residual-current-operated circuit breaker is used, touch protection can be ensured by
means of double insulation or by isolating the Power Module from the supply system via a
transformer.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
35
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.5 Overvoltage protection
2.5
Overvoltage protection
To protect the units against line-side surge voltages, you are advised to install an
overvoltage protection device directly at the infeed point (upstream of the main switch).
To fulfill the requirements of CSA C22.2 no. 14-05, surge protection is essential. For
examples of suitable voltage surge arresters, see www.raycap.com (for example)
Manual
36
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.6 Line contactors
2.6
Line contactors
A line contactor is required if the drive line-up needs to be electrically isolated from the
power supply.
When selecting a line contactor, the characteristic values in the technical data apply.
The cable routing, the bundling factor and the factor for the ambient temperature according
to EN 60204-1 must be taken into account when dimensioning the various cables.
CAUTION
Line contactors must not be switched under load.
Note
To limit the switching overvoltage, the contactor coil must be connected to an overvoltage
limiter (e.g. flywheel diode or varistor).
When the digital output is used to control the line contactor, its making/breaking capacity
must be taken into account.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
37
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.7 Line filter
2.7
Line filter
2.7.1
Description
In conjunction with a suitably EMC-compliant system configuration, line filters limit the
conducted interference emitted by the Power Modules to the limit values of Category C2 acc.
to EN 61800-3.
A separate line filter (see catalog) must be used for the SINAMICS S110 drive line-up.
Note
All PM340 Power Modules are available with integrated line filters.
This does not apply, however, to frame size FSA for a 3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC line supply
voltage; an external line filter is required here.
NOTICE
An additional line filter must be used to suppress interference in other loads. To prevent
mutual interference, this line filter must not be equipped with line-side capacitors with
respect to ground. Filter series B84144A*R120 (EPCOS) is recommended.
Note
According to product standard EN 61800-3, RFI suppression commensurate with the
relevant rated conditions must be provided and is a legal requirement in the EU (EMC
Directive). Line filters and/or line reactors are required for this purpose. The use of filters of
other makes can lead to limit value violations, resonances, overvoltages and irreparable
damage to motors or other equipment. The machine manufacturer must provide verification
that the machinery to be operated with the drive products and the installed suppression
elements, e.g. line filters, are CE/EMC-compliant before the machines are approved for
delivery.
Manual
38
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.7 Line filter
2.7.2
Safety information
DANGER
Line filters are only suitable for direct connection to TN systems with grounded neutral
conductor.
WARNING
The cooling clearances of 100 mm above and below the components must be observed.
This prevents thermal overload of the line filter.
WARNING
The connections must not be interchanged:
 Incoming line cable to LINE/NETZ L1, L2, L3
 Outgoing cable to the line reactor to LOAD/LAST L1', L2', L3'
Non-observance may damage the line filter
CAUTION
Using line filters not released by Siemens AG for SINAMICS can lead to line reactions that
can damage or destroy other loads powered from the network.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
39
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.7 Line filter
2.7.3
Dimension drawing
Blocksize line filter
š
š
0
Figure 2-2
Dimension drawing of line filter, frame size FSA, all data in mm and (inches)
Manual
40
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.7 Line filter
2.7.4
Installation
/LQHILOWHU
303RZHU0RGXOH
)UDPHVL]H)6$
6FUHHQLQJ.LW
Figure 2-3
Mounting: Power Module PM340 frame size FSA with Screening Kit and line filter
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
41
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.7 Line filter
2.7.5
Table 2- 1
Technical data, Blocksize line filter
Technical data, Blocksize line filter
Line supply voltage 3-ph. 380...480 V AC
Line filter 6SE6400-2FA00-6AD0
Suitable for Power Module
6SL3210-1SE11-3UA0, 6SL3210-1SE11-7UA0
6SL3210-1SE12-2UA0, 6SL3210-1SE13-1UA0
6SL3210-1SE14-1UA0
Rated current
A
6
Power loss
W
<5
Line supply connection
L1, L2, L3
2.5 mm screw terminals2
PE connection
At the housing with M4 stud
Load connection
U, V, W
Shielded cable 3 x 2.5 mm2
0.4 m long
Degree of protection
IP20 or IPXXB
Weight, approx.
kg
0.5
Manual
42
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.8 Line reactors
2.8
Line reactors
2.8.1
Description
The line reactors limit low-frequency line harmonics and reduce the load on the rectifiers in
the Power Modules. They are used to smooth voltage spikes (line supply faults) or to bridge
voltage dips/interruptions when commutating. We therefore recommend the use of line
reactors with PM340 Power Modules.
The line reactors are sub-chassis components.
2.8.2
Safety information
WARNING
The cooling clearances of 100 mm above and below the components must be observed.
Note
The connecting cables to the Power Module must be as short as possible (max. 5 m).
If possible, they should be shielded.
WARNING
The connections must not be interchanged:
- Incoming line cable at U1, V1, W1 or L1, N and
- Outgoing cable to the load 1U2, 1V2, 1W2.
CAUTION
When using line reactors that have not been approved by SIEMENS for SINAMICS, the
following can occur:
- the Power Modules could be damaged/destroyed.
- Line harmonics that may interfere with or damage other loads connected to the same line
supply.
CAUTION
The surface temperature of the line reactors may exceed 80 °C.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
43
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.8 Line reactors
2.8.3
Dimension drawings
Blocksize line reactors
%
&
)UDPHVL]H)6&
%
&
$
)UDPHVL]H)6%
%
&
$
)UDPHVL]H)6$
Figure 2-4
Table 2- 2
$
Dimension drawing of line reactors, frame sizes FSA, FSB, and FSC
Dimensions of line reactors, frame size FSA, all data in mm and (inches)
Line reactor 6SE6400-
3CC00-4AB3
3CC01-0AB3
3CC00-2AD3
Frame size
FSA
A
200 (7.87)
B
75 (2.95)
C
50 (1.96)
Table 2- 3
3CC00-4AD3
3CC00-6AD3
Dimensions of line reactors, frame sizes FSB and FSC, all data in mm and (inches)
Line reactor 6SL3203-
0CD21-0AA0
0CD21-4AA0
0CD22-2AA0
0CD23-5AA0
Frame size
FSB
FSC
A
270 (10.62)
336 (13.22)
336 (13.22)
B
153 (6.02)
189 (7.44)
189 (7.44)
C
70 (2.75)
50 (1.96)
80 (3.14)
Manual
44
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.8 Line reactors
%
&
)UDPHVL]H)6(
%
&
$
$
)UDPHVL]H)6'
Figure 2-5
Table 2- 4
Dimension drawing of line reactors, frame sizes FSD and FSE
Dimensions of line reactors, frame sizes FSD and FSE, all data in mm and (inches)
Line reactor 6SL3203-
0CJ24-5AA0
0CD25-3AA0
0CJ28-6AA0
Frame size
FSD
FSE
A
455 (17.91)
577 (22.71)
B
275 (10.82)
275 (10.82)
C
83.5 (3.28)
93.5 (3.68)
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
45
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.8 Line reactors
&
$
%
Figure 2-6
Table 2- 5
Dimensions of line reactor, frame size FSF, all data in mm and (inches)
Line reactor 6SE6400-
2.8.4
Dimension drawing of line reactor, frame size FSF
3CC11-2FD0
3CC11-7FD0
Frame size
FSF
A
240 (9.44)
B
141 (5.55)
C
228 (8.97)
Installation
The line reactors for Power Modules with frame sizes FSA to FSE are designed as subchassis components. The line reactor is attached to the mounting surface and, to save
space, the Power Module is mounted directly on the line reactor. The cables to the Power
Modules are already connected at the line reactor. The line reactor is connected to the line
supply through terminals.
When installed, the power supply terminals are at the top on frame sizes FSA to FSC, and at
the bottom on frame sizes FSD and FSE.
Manual
46
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.8 Line reactors
Given their weight and their size, the line reactors for Power Modules with frame size FSF
are mounted separately.
,
+
Figure 2-7
Table 2- 6
-
Mounting dimensions for line reactors with frame size FSA
Mounting dimensions for line reactors with frame size FSA, all data in mm and (inches)
Line reactor 6SE6400-
3CC00-4AB3
3CC01-0AB3
3CC00-2AD3
Frame size
FSA
H
160 (6.29)
I
56 (2.20)
J
187 (7.36)
Securing screws
M4/1.1 Nm
3CC00-4AD3
3CC00-6AD3
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
47
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.8 Line reactors
,
*
-
+
Figure 2-8
Table 2- 7
Mounting dimensions for line reactors with frame sizes FSB and FSC
Mounting dimensions for line reactors with frame sizes FSB and FSC, all data in mm and (inches)
Line reactor 6SL3203-
0CD21-0AA0
0CD21-4AA0
0CD22-2AA0
0CD22-2AA0
0CD23-5AA0
Frame size
FSB
FSC
G
138 (5.43)
174 (6.85)
H
174 (6.85)
204 (8.03)
I
120 (4.72)
156 (6.14)
J
200 (7.87)
232 (9.13)
Securing screws
M4/1.5 Nm
M5/2.25 Nm
Manual
48
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.8 Line reactors
*
+
+
-
,
Figure 2-9
Table 2- 8
Mounting dimensions for line reactors with frame sizes FSD and FSE
Mounting dimensions for line reactors with frame sizes FSD and FSE, all data in mm and (inches)
Line reactor 6SL3203-
0CD25-3AA0
0CJ24-5AA0
0CJ28-6AA0
Frame size
FSD
G
235 (9.25)
235 (9.25)
235 (9.25)
FSE
H1
325 (12.79)
325 (12.79)
405 (15.95)
H2
419 (16.50)
419 (16.50)
541 (21.30)
I
235 (9.25)
235 (9.25)
235 (9.25)
J
421 (16.57)
421 (16.57)
544 (21.42)
Securing screws
4 x M8/13 Nm
4 x M8/13 Nm
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
49
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.8 Line reactors
'
(
Figure 2-10
Mounting dimensions for line reactors with frame size FSF
Table 2- 9
Mounting dimensions for line reactors with frame size FSF, all data in mm and (inches)
Line reactor 6SE6400-
3CC11-2FD0
3CC11-7FD0
Frame size
FSF
D
185 (7.28)
E
95 (3.74)
Securing screws
4 x M8/13 Nm
Manual
50
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.8 Line reactors
Mounting examples
Figure 2-11
Mounting of PM340 with line reactor (based on frame size FSB)
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
51
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.8 Line reactors
/DWHUDOUHWDLQLQJKROGHU
)UDPHVL]H)6%
Figure 2-12
)UDPHVL]H)6&
Side mounting of line reactors with frame sizes FSB and FSC
Manual
52
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.8 Line reactors
Figure 2-13
Mounting of PM340 with line reactor (based on frame size FSD)
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
53
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.8 Line reactors
2.8.5
Electrical Connection
Line supply/load connection
3RZHU
0RGXOH
/LQHUHDFWRU
8
8
/
9
9 /
/LQHVXSSO\
:
0
:
a
/
3(
3(
Figure 2-14
Power Module with line filter
/LQHILOWHU
/LQHUHDFWRU
8 8 9 /LQHVXSSO\
/
8
/
/
9
/
/
:
/
9 : 0
: 3(
Figure 2-15
3RZHU
0RGXOH
3(
a
3(
Power Module Blocksize with line reactor and line filter
Manual
54
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.8 Line reactors
2.8.6
Table 2- 10
Technical data, Blocksize
Technical specifications, blocksize line reactors, frame size FSA
Line supply voltage 1-ph 200 V AC -10 % to 240 V AC +10%
Order No. 6SE6400-
3CC00-4AB3
3CC01-0AB3
Suitable for Power Module
6SL3210-
1SB11-0xxx
1SB12-3xxx
1SB14-0xxx
Rated line reactor current
A
3.4
8.1
Power loss
50 / 60 Hz
W
12.5/15
11.5/14.5
Line supply connection L1, N
6 mm screw terminals2
6 mm screw terminals2
Load connection
1U2, 1V2, 1W2
Cable 3 x 1.5
Length approx. 0.38 m
Cable 3 x 1.5 mm2
Length approx. 0.38 m
PE connection
M5 stud
M5 stud
Degree of protection
IP20 or IPXXB
IP20 or IPXXB
1.3
1.3
mm2
Weight
Table 2- 11
kg
Technical specifications, blocksize line reactors, frame size FSA
Line supply voltage 3-ph 380 V AC -10 % to 480 V AC +10 %
Order no. 6SE6400-
3CC00-2AD3
3CC00-4AD3
3CC00-6AD3
Suitable for
Power Module 6SL3210-
1SE11-3UA0
1SE11-7UA0
1SE12-2UA0
1SE13-1UA0
1SE14-1UA0
Rated line reactor current
A
1.9
3.5
4.8
Power loss
50 / 60 Hz
W
6/7
12.5/15
7.5/9
Line supply connection
U1, V1, W1
Screw-type terminal 6 mm2
Screw-type terminal 6 mm2
Screw-type terminal 6 mm2
Load connection
1U2, 1V2, 1W2
Cable 4 x 1.5 mm2
Length approx. 0.38 m
Cable 4 x 1.5 mm2
Length approx. 0.38 m
Cable 4 x 1.5 mm2
Length approx. 0.38 m
PE connection
At the housing with M5
stud
At the housing with M5
stud
At the housing with M5
stud
Degree of protection
Weight
kg
IP20 or IPXXB
IP20 or IPXXB
IP20 or IPXXB
1.2
1.3
1.3
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
55
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.8 Line reactors
Table 2- 12
Technical specifications, blocksize line reactors, frame sizes FSB and FSC
Line supply voltage 3-ph 380 V AC -10% to 480 V AC +10%
Frame size
FSB
Order No. 6SL3203-
0CD21-0AA0
0CD21-4AA0
0CD22-2AA0
0CD23-5AA0
Suitable for
Power Module
6SL3210Rated line reactor
current
Power loss
50 / 60 Hz
1SE16-0xxx
1SE17-7xxx
1SE21-0xxx
1SE21-8xxx
1SE22-5xxx
1SE23-2xxx
A
9
11.6
25
31.3
W
9/11
27/32
98/118
37/44
Line supply
connection
U1, V1, W1
Load connection
1U2, 1V2, 1W2
Screw-type terminal
6 mm2
Screw-type terminal
6 mm2
Screw-type terminal
6 mm2
Screw-type terminal
6 mm2
Cable 4 x 1.5 mm2
Length approx.
0.46 m
Cable 4 x 1.5 mm2
Length approx.
0.46 m
Cable 4 x 2.5 mm2
Length approx.
0.49 m
Cable 4 x 2.5 mm2
Length approx.
0.49 m
PE connection
At the housing with
M5 stud
IP20 or IPXXB
3.4
At the housing with
M5 stud
IP20 or IPXXB
3.4
At the housing with
M5 stud
IP20 or IPXXB
6.3
At the housing with
M5 stud
IP20 or IPXXB
6.4
Degree of protection
Weight
Table 2- 13
kg
FSC
Technical specifications, blocksize line reactors, frame sizes FSD, FSE, and FSF
Line supply voltage 3-ph 380 V AC -10% to 480 V AC +10%
Frame size
FSD
Order number
6SL32030CJ24-5AA0
Suitable for
Power Module
6SL32106SL3215-
FSE
FSF
6SL32030CD25-3AA0
6SL32030CJ28-6AA0
6SE64003CC11-2FD0
6SE64003CC11-7FD0
1SE23-8xxx
1SE24-5xxx
1SE23-8UAx
1SE26-0xxx
1SE27-5xxx
1SE31-0xxx
1SE27-5UAx
1SE31-0UAx
1SE31-1xxx
1SE31-5xxx
1SE31-1UAx
1SE31-8xxx
1SE26-0UAx
1SE31-8UAx
Rated line
reactor current
A
54
71
105
178
225
Power loss
50/60 Hz
W
90/115
90/115
170/215
280/360
280/360
Line supply
connection
U1, V1, W1
Screw-type
terminal
16 mm2
Screw-type
terminal
16 mm2
Screw-type
terminal
50 mm2
Flat connector
for M10 cable
lug
Flat connector for
M10 cable lug
Load
connection
1U2, 1V2, 1W2
Cable
4 x 16 mm2
Length approx.
0.70 m
Cable
4 x 16 mm2
Length approx.
0.70 m
Cable
4 x 35 mm2
Length approx.
0.70 m
Flat connector
for M10 cable
lug
Flat connector for
M10 cable lug
PE connection
At the housing with At the housing with At the housing with On housing with
M8 screw
M8 screw
M8 screw
M8 bolt
On housing with
M8 bolt
Degree of
protection
IP20 or IPXXB
IP20 or IPXXB
IP20 or IPXXB
IP00
IP00
13
13
19
25
25
Weight
kg
Manual
56
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.9 Line connection variants
2.9
Line connection variants
2.9.1
Methods of line connection
A distinction is made between:
● Direct operation of the line connection components on the supply system
● Operation of the Line Connection Components via an Autotransformer
● Operating line connection components via an isolating transformer
'LUHFWFRQQHFWLRQ
SK9WR9$&sRU
SK9WR9$&s
7\SH%$&'&VHQVLWLYHUHVLGXDOFXUUHQWRSHUDWHGFLUFXLWEUHDNHU
RSWLRQDO
/ / / 1
1
$XWRWUDQVIRUPHU
/LQH
UHDFWRU
/LQHVXSSO\YROWDJH9
RU9
/LQHVXSSO\YROWDJH!9
RU!9
,VRODWLQJ
WUDQVIRUPHU
/LQHILOWHU
LQWHUQDO
H[WHUQDO
71V\VWHP
1RQ$&'&VHQVLWLYH
UHVLGXDOFXUUHQWRSHUDWHG
FLUFXLWEUHDNHU
7\SH$DQG7\SH$&
,QVWDOODWLRQDOWLWXGH!P
3RZHU
0RGXOH
8 9 :
/LQHILOWHUUHTXLUHGRQ,777
V\VWHPV
71RU77V\VWHPVZLWKJURXQGHGQHXWUDOSRLQWRU,7V\VWHPVZLWKPRQLWRULQJ
$Q\OLQHVXSSO\V\VWHP
:LWKJURXQGHGQHXWUDOSRLQW
Figure 2-16
Overview of line connection variants
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
57
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.9 Line connection variants
Note
Line connection of motors
In combination with the drive system, the motors are generally approved for operation on TN
and TT systems with grounded neutral point and on IT systems.
In operation on IT systems, the occurrence of a first fault between an active part and ground
must be signaled by a monitoring device. In accordance with IEC 60364-4-41, it is
recommended that the first fault be eliminated as quickly as is practically possible in order to
minimize the temporary overload of the motor insulation.
In all other systems, except TN and TT systems with grounded neutral point and IT systems,
such as systems with a grounded line conductor, an isolating transformer with grounded
neutral point (secondary side) must be connected between the supply and the drive system
in order to protect the motor insulation from continuous excessive stress.
2.9.2
Operation of the Line Connection Components on the Supply Network
The SINAMICS S Blocksize drive system is designed to be directly connected to TN, TT line
supply systems with grounded neutral conductor or grounded phase conductor as well as to
IT line systems with rated voltages from 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC and 1-ph. 200 V to 240 V
AC. Operation with line filter is only possible, without having to use additional measures,
when connected to TN line supply systems with grounded neutral conductor.
/
/
/
1
3(
$GGLWLRQDO
ORDGV
)XVHV
/LQHFRQWDFWRU
/LQHUHDFWRU
RSWLRQDO
/LQHILOWHULQWH[W
RSWLRQDO
/ / /
3RZHU
0RGXOH
8 9 :
Figure 2-17
/
1
3RZHU
0RGXOH
8 9 :
Direct operation on the line supply
Manual
58
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.9 Line connection variants
Operation of single-phase units on the Single Phase Grounded Midpoint line system configuration
The line connection depicted below applies to the operation of single-phase units
(1-ph. 230 V AC) on the Single Phase Grounded Midpoint line system configuration
commonly used in the USA:
9
9
9
1
9
9
3(
/
1
3RZHU
0RGXOH
8 9 :
Figure 2-18
Direct operation on Single Phase Grounded Midpoint line system configuration
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
59
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.9 Line connection variants
2.9.3
Operation of the Line Connection Components via an Autotransformer
An autotransformer can be used to adapt the voltage in the range up to 3-ph. 480 V AC
+10 % or 1-ph. 240 V AC +10 %.
CAUTION
To ensure safe electrical separation, an isolating transformer must be used for voltages
greater than 3-ph. 480 V AC and 1-ph. 240 V AC.
Application example:
● The motor insulation must be protected from excessive voltages.
/
/
/
1
$GGLWLRQDO
ORDGV
3(
)XVHV
$XWRWUDQVIRUPHU
1
)XVHV
/LQHFRQWDFWRU
/LQHUHDFWRU
RSWLRQDO
/LQHILOWHU
LQWH[W
RSWLRQDO
/ / /
3RZHU
0RGXOH
8 9 :
Figure 2-19
/
1
3RZHU
0RGXOH
8 9 :
Autotransformer
Manual
60
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.9 Line connection variants
2.9.4
Operation of the Line Connection Components via an Isolating Transformer
The isolating transformer converts the type of the line supply type in the plant (e.g. IT/TT line
supply) to a TN line supply. Additional voltage adaptation to the permissible voltage
tolerance range is possible.
An isolating transformer must be used in the following cases:
● The insulation of the Power Module and/or the motor is not adequate for the voltages that
occur.
● There is no compatibility to an existing residual-current protective device.
● The installation altitude is greater than 2000 m above sea level.
● For all other systems that are not TN line supply systems with grounded neutral
conductor, a line filter should always be used.
CAUTION
If the line supply voltage is greater than 3-ph. 480 V AC +10% or 1-ph. 240 V AC +10%, it
is not permissible that an autotransformer is used.
In order to ensure protective separation, an isolating transformer must always be used.
/
/
/
1
$GGLWLRQDO
ORDGV
3(
)XVHV
,VRODWLQJWUDQVIRUPHU
1
1
)XVHV
/LQHFRQWDFWRU
/LQHUHDFWRU
RSWLRQDO
/LQHILOWHU
LQWH[W
RSWLRQDO
/ / /
3RZHU
0RGXOH
8 9 :
Figure 2-20
/
1
3RZHU
0RGXOH
8 9 :
Isolating transformer
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
61
Mains connection and line-side power components
2.9 Line connection variants
Manual
62
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
3
Power Modules
3.1
Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3.1.1
Description
The Power Modules in blocksize format are designed as follows:
● Line-side diode rectifier
● DC link electrolytic capacitors with pre-charging circuit
● Output inverter
● Braking chopper for (external) braking resistor
● 24 V DC / 1 A power supply
● Gating unit, actual value acquisition
● Fan to cool the power semiconductors
The Power Modules cover the power range from 0.12 kW to 90.0 kW and are available in
versions with and without line filter.
Table 3- 1
Overview, Power Modules PM340 (selection)
Power Module (230 V) frame size FSA, with and without
integrated line filter
Power Module frame size FSB, with and without integrated line
filter
Power Module (400 V) frame size FSA, without
integrated line filter
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
63
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
Power Module frame size FSC, with and without
integrated line filter
Power Module frame size FSD, with and without integrated line
filter
Power Module frame size FSE, with and without
integrated line filter
Power Module frame size FSF, with and without integrated line
filter
Manual
64
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3.1.2
Safety information
CAUTION
During transport and during storage, Power Modules must be protected against mechanical
shock and vibration. It is also important to protect the unit against water (rain) and against
excessively high/excessively low temperatures.
Note
Connection authorization
Power Modules have been designed for use in the industrial environment and generate
current harmonics on the line side as a result of the rectifier circuit.
When connecting a machine with integrated Power Modules to the public low-voltage line
supply, authorization is required in advance from the local power supply company (utility
company) if
 the rated input current of the motor ≤ 16 A per conductor, and
 the rated input current of the motor does not comply with the requirements specified in
EN 61000-3-2 regarding current harmonics.
WARNING
In a residential environment this product can cause radio disturbances, which may make
interference-suppression measures necessary.
DANGER
Grounding/protective grounding of the Power Module
The Power Module housing must always be grounded. If the Power Module is not correctly
grounded, then extremely hazardous states can occur, which under certain circumstances,
can result in death.
DANGER
It must be checked as to whether the Power Module is designed for the correct power
supply - higher supply voltages may not be connected to the Power Module.
DANGER
After connecting the line and motor feeder cables to the appropriate terminals, check that
the front covers (only frame sizes FSD to FSF) are closed and latched. Only then may the
Power Module be connected to the power supply.
NOTICE
For a UL-approved system use UL-approved cables only.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
65
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
DANGER
Once all the supply voltages have been disconnected, a hazardous voltage may be present
in the power unit for up to 5 minutes. The cover for the terminals may only be opened after
this time has definitely elapsed.
When opening the protective cover, you must activate the release. A suitable tool (e.g.
screwdriver) must be used for this purpose.
Damaged components must not be used, otherwise this could result in secondary damage
or accidents.
DANGER
The hazard warning in the local language for the DC link discharge time must be affixed to
the component. A set of labels bearing this warning in 16 languages is provided with the
component.
DANGER
The drive components generate high leakage currents in the protective conductor. The
components must only be operated in cabinets or in closed electrical operating areas and
must be connected with the protective conductor. To protect against electric shock, the
protective conductor connection on the cabinet or machine must be implemented in
accordance with one of the following measures:
 Fixed connection and protective conductor connection by means of ≥ 10 mm2 Cu or ≥
16 mm2 Al
 stationary connection and automatic shutdown of the power supply if the protective
conductor is interrupted
Manual
66
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
WARNING
Cooling and mounting clearances for Power Modules
Power Modules must be mounted in the vertical position.
The following clearances must be observed between the components when mounting 1):
- frame size FSA: 30 mm (1.18 inch)
- frame size FSB: 40 mm (1.57 inch)
- frame size FSC: 50 mm (1.96 inch)
The following cooling clearances must be observed above and below the component:
- frame sizes FSA and FSB: 100 mm (3.93 inch)
- frame size FSC: 125 mm (4.92 inch)
- frame sizes FSD and FSE: 300 mm (11.81 inch) and
- frame size FSF: 350 mm (13.77 inches).
The following cooling clearances must be observed in front of the component:
- frame sizes FSB to FSF: 30 mm (1.18 inch)
Devices, that could restrict the cooling air flow may not be mounted/installed in this area.
It must be carefully ensured that the cooling air flow of the Power Modules can flow
unrestricted.
1) The Power Modules can be mounted side by side without sub-chassis components up to an ambient temperature of 40 °C.
In combination with sub-chassis components and at ambient temperatures of 40 °C to 55 °C, the specified lateral minimum clearances must
be observed. Where combinations of different frame sizes are concerned, the longer of the two clearances shall apply.
DANGER
Cable shields and unused power-cable cores (e.g. brake cores) must be connected to PE
potential to dissipate capacitive cross-talk charges.
Non-observance can cause lethal shock voltages.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
67
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3.1.3
Interface description
3.1.3.1
Overview
3RZHU0RGXOH
,QWHUIDFH30,)
&RQQHFWLRQWRWKHRSWLRQPRGXOH
%UDNLQJVLJQDO
'&OLQN
FRQQHFWLRQ'&3'&1
/LQHVXSSO\FRQQHFWLRQ
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU55
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUFRQQHFWLRQIRU
OLQHVXSSO\FDEOH
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUFRQQHFWLRQIRU
PRWRUFDEOH
Figure 3-1
PM340, frame size FSA
Manual
68
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3RZHU0RGXOH
,QWHUIDFH30,)
&RQQHFWLRQZLWK
RSWLRQPRGXOH
%UDNLQJVLJQDO
/LQHVXSSO\FRQQHFWLRQ
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUFRQQHF
WLRQ
IRUWKHOLQHVXSSO\FDEOH
'&OLQN
FRQQHFWLRQ'&3'&1
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU55
Figure 3-2
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
IRUWKHPRWRUFDEOH
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
PM340, frame size FSB
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
69
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3RZHU0RGXOH
,QWHUIDFH30,)
&RQQHFWLRQZLWK
RSWLRQPRGXOH
%UDNHFRQWURO
/LQHFRQQHFWLRQ
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
IRUWKHOLQHVXSSO\FDEOH
'&OLQN
FRQQHFWLRQ'&3'&1
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
IRUPRWRUFDEOH
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU55
Figure 3-3
PM340, frame size FSC
Manual
70
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3RZHU0RGXOH
,QWHUIDFH30,)
/LQHFRQQHFWLRQ
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUFRQQHFWLRQIRU
OLQHVXSSO\FDEOH
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
'&OLQN
FRQQHFWLRQ'&3'&1
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU55
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
IRUPRWRUFDEOH
Figure 3-4
&RQQHFWLRQWRWKHRSWLRQPRGXOH
%UDNHFRQWURO
DWWKHORZHUVLGHRIWKH3RZHU0RGXOH
PM340, frame size FSD
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
71
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3RZHU0RGXOH
,QWHUIDFH30,)
/LQHFRQQHFWLRQ
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQIRU
OLQHVXSSO\FDEOH
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
'&OLQN
FRQQHFWLRQ'&3'&1
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU55
Figure 3-5
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
IRUPRWRUFDEOH
&RQQHFWLRQWRWKHRSWLRQPRGXOH
%UDNHFRQWURO
DWWKHORZHUVLGHRIWKH3RZHU0RGXOH
PM340, frame size FSE
Manual
72
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3RZHU0RGXOH
,QWHUIDFH30,)
/LQHFRQQHFWLRQ
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQIRU
OLQHVXSSO\FDEOH
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
'&OLQN
FRQQHFWLRQ'&3'&1
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU55
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
IRUPRWRUFDEOH
Figure 3-6
&RQQHFWLRQWRWKHRSWLRQPRGXOH
%UDNHFRQWURO
DWWKHORZHUVLGHRIWKH3RZHU0RGXOH
PM340, frame size FSF
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
73
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
Arrangement of the line supply and motor terminals
The following diagram shows the arrangement of the line and motor terminals for frame sizes
FSA to FSF of the PM340 Power Module. The diagram also includes the terminal tightening
torques.
)UDPHVL]H)6$1P
)UDPHVL]H)6%1P
)UDPHVL]H)6&1P
)UDPHVL]HV)6')6(
01P
)UDPHVL]H)6)
01P
)UDPHVL]HV)6'WR)6)
Figure 3-7
Arrangement of the line supply and motor terminals for the PM340
Manual
74
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3.1.3.2
Table 3- 2
Line supply connection
Terminal block, line supply connection 1-ph. 200 V - 240 V AC
/
8
/
Terminal
Signal name
Technical specifications
1
L
Line phase L
2
N
Line phase N
1
9
/
Max. conductor cross-section: 2.5 mm²
Table 3- 3
3.1.3.3
Table 3- 4
Terminal block, line supply connection 3-ph. 380 V - 480 V AC
Terminal
Signal name
Technical specifications
1
U1/L1
External conductor L1
2
V1/L2
External conductor L2
3
W1/L3
External conductor L3
4
PE
PE connection
Motor connection
Terminal block, motor connection 200 V - 240 V 1 AC and 380 V - 480 V 3 AC
Terminal
Technical specifications
PE connection
U2
Motor phase U
V2
Motor phase V
W2
Motor phase W
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
75
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3.1.3.4
Table 3- 5
Braking resistor and DC link connection
Terminal block, braking resistor, and DC link connection
Terminal
Technical specifications
DCN
DC link negative
DCP/R1
DC link positive and positive connection for braking resistor
R2
Negative connection for the braking resistor
Note
To connect the cable lugs of the brake resistor cable to a PM340 Power Module frame size
FSA it is necessary to nip the lug on connection R2 off using a diagonal cutter tool. Take
great care to ensure that no pieces of plastic fall into the housing.
3.1.3.5
Table 3- 6
Connection to the option module, brake control
Connector
Terminal
Designation
Technical specifications
1
Low
Low signal, option module brake control at PM340
2
High
High signal, option module brake control at PM340
Manual
76
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3.1.4
Example connections
SKWR9$&
/
1
ื9$&
ื9'&
3(
)XVH
/LQHFRQWDFWRU
/LQHUHDFWRU
/
1
3(
3RZHU
0RGXOH
30
%ORFNVL]H
30,)LQWHUIDFHWR
&RQWURO8QLW&8
5
'&35
˽
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
w3
'&1
8
9'&
SRZHU
VXSSO\
IRUEUDNH
Figure 3-8
6DIH%UDNH
5HOD\
9 :
3(
0
a
2QO\IRU30ZLWKLQWHJUDWHGOLQHILOWHU
7KHEUDNLQJUHVLVWRUFRQQHFWLRQPXVWEHVKLHOGHG,IDEUDNLQJUHVLVWRU
LVEHLQJXVHGWKLVPXVWEHSURWHFWHGE\DOLQHFRQWDFWRU
&75/
Connection example PM340, 1-ph. 200 V - 240 V AC
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
77
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
SKWR9$&
ื9$&
ื9'&
/ / / 3(
/LQHUHDFWRU
8 9 :
3(
/ / /
3RZHU
0RGXOH
30
%ORFNVL]H
30,)LQWHUIDFHWR
&RQWURO8QLW&8
5
˽
'&35
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
'&1
w3
8 9 : 3(
9'&
SRZHUVXSSO\
IRUEUDNH
Figure 3-9
6DIH%UDNH
5HOD\
0
a
2QO\IRU30ZLWKLQWHJUDWHGOLQHILOWHU
7KHEUDNLQJUHVLVWRUFRQQHFWLRQPXVWEHVKLHOGHG
Connection example PM340, 3-ph. 380 V - 480 V AC
Manual
78
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3.1.5
Figure 3-10
Dimension drawings
Dimension drawings, Power Module PM340
Frame size FSC
Frame size FSB
Frame size FSA
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
79
š
š
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
&RQQHFWLRQV0
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P
Figure 3-11
Dimension drawing: Power Module PM340, frame size FSD
Manual
80
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
Figure 3-12
š
Dimension drawing: Power Module PM340 with integrated line filter, frame size FSD
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
81
š š
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
&RQQHFWLRQV0
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P
Figure 3-13
Dimension drawing: Power Module PM340, frame size FSE
Manual
82
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Figure 3-14
š
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
Dimension drawing: Power Module PM340 with integrated line filter, frame size FSE
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
83
š
š
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
&RQQHFWLRQV0
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P
Figure 3-15
Dimension drawing: Power Module PM340, frame size FSF
Manual
84
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
š
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
Figure 3-16
Dimension drawing: Power Module PM340 with integrated line filter, frame size FSF
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
85
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3.1.6
Mounting
3.1.6.1
Drilling patterns
Drilling templates for frame sizes FSA and FSC
PP
PP
š
PP
š
š
PP
PP
PP
)UDPHVL]H)6$
)UDPHVL]H)6%
)UDPHVL]H)6&
Figure 3-17
Drilling templates for frame sizes FSA and FSC
Manual
86
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
Drilling templates for frame sizes FSD to FSF
PP
PP
PP
PP
šPP
šPP
šPP
PP
PP
PP
)UDPHVL]H)6'ZLWKRXWOLQHILOWHU
)UDPHVL]H)6'ZLWKOLQHILOWHU
PP
PP
PP
PP
šPP
šPP
PP
)UDPHVL]H)6(ZLWKRXWOLQHILOWHU
šPP
PP
PP
)UDPHVL]H)6(ZLWKOLQHILOWHU
)UDPHVL]H)6)ZLWKRXWOLQHILOWHU
)UDPHVL]H)6)ZLWKOLQHILOWHU
Figure 3-18
Drilling templates for frame sizes FSD to FSF - with and without line filter
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
87
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3.1.6.2
Mounting dimensions and tightening torques
The mounting dimensions and the tightening torques for fixing the Power Modules are
specified in the following table.
Table 3- 7
Frame size
PM340, dimensions and tightening torques for mounting
Height, width, depth
Dimensions
Retaining type
Tightening torques
2 x M4 studs,
2 x M4 nuts,
2 x M4 washers
2.5 Nm with washers
(with Control Unit)
FSA
FSB
FSC
FSD
without line
filter
HxWxD
HxWxD
HxWxD
HxWxD
FSD
HxWxD
with
integrated line
filter
FSE
without line
filter
HxWxD
FSE
HxWxD
with
integrated line
filter
FSF
without line
filter
HxWxD
FSF
HxWxD
with
integrated line
filter
Table 3- 8
mm
173 x 73 x 145
Inches
6.81 x 2.87 x 5.71
mm
270 x 153 x 165
Inches
10.63 x 6.02 x 6.50
mm
334 x 189 x 185
Inches
13.1 x 7.41 x 7.28
mm
419 x 275 x 204
Inches
16.3 x 10.8 x 8.0
mm
512 x 275 x 204
Inches
20.1 x 10.8 x 8.0
mm
499 x 275 x 204
Inches
19.6 x 10.8 x 8.0
mm
635 x 275 x 204
Inches
25 x 10.8 x 8.0
mm
635 x 350 x 316
Inches
25.0 x 13.8 x 12.4
mm
934 x 350 x 316
Inches
36.8 x 13.8 x 12.4
4 x M4 studs,
4 x M4 nuts,
4 x M4 washers
4 x M5 studs,
4 x M5 nuts,
4 x M5 washers
4 x M6 studs,
4 x M6nuts,
4 x M6 washers
6 Nm with washers
4 x M8 studs,
4 x M8 nuts,
4 x M8 washers
13 Nm with washers
PM340, load terminals - Tightening torques
Frame size
Tightening torques
FSA
Nm
1.1
FSB
Nm
1.5
FSC
Nm
2.25
FSD
Nm
6
FSE
Nm
6
FSF
Nm
13
Manual
88
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3.1.6.3
Access to the power supply terminals and motor terminals
For frame sizes FSD to FSF, the terminals are accessed by releasing the tongue at the side
of the terminal covers using a suitable flat screwdriver. The cover can then be pushed
upwards and engaged in this position as shown in the following diagram.
Figure 3-19
Access to the line and motor terminals for frame sizes FSD to FSF
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
89
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
DANGER
Once the terminal cover has been removed, the degree of protection of the Power Module
is reduced to IP00.
Operation on non-grounded line supply systems (IT)
It is not permissible to use Power Modules with integrated line filter in IT line supply systems.
3.1.7
Technical data
3.1.7.1
Power Modules Blocksize, 1-ph. AC
Table 3- 9
Technical data PM340, 1-ph. AC
Line supply voltage 1-ph. 200 V to 240 V AC ±10%
PM340
6SL3210–
1SB11-0UA0
1SB12-3UA0
1SB14-0UA0
PM340 with integrated line filter
6SL3210–
1SB11-0AA0
1SB12-3AA0
1SB14-0AA0
FSA
FSA
FSA
Frame size
Output current
Rated current In
Base-load current IH
for S6 operation (40%) ls6
Peak current lmax
A
A
A
A
0.9
0.8
1.4
2.0
2.3
2.0
3.3
4.6
3.9
3.4
5.5
7.8
Unit rating based on In 1)
kW
0.12
0.37
0.75
Rated pulse frequency
kHz
4
4
4
Power loss
kW
0.06
0.075
0.11
Cooling air requirement
m3/s
0.005
0.005
0.005
Sound pressure level LpA (1 m)
dB
< 45
< 45
< 45
24 V DC supply
for the Control Unit
A
1.0
1.0
1.0
Rated input current 2)
without/with integrated line reactor
A
1.4 / 2.2
4/6
6.5 / 10
6
65
10
65
15
65
5SJ4206-7HG41
5SJ4210-7HG41
5SJ4216-7HG41
6
10
16
Class J UL safety fuses
Rated current
Rated short-circuit current SCCR
Circuit breaker type designation
EN 60947
Rated current
A
kA
A
Manual
90
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
Line supply voltage 1-ph. 200 V to 240 V AC ±10%
PM340
6SL3210–
1SB11-0UA0
1SB12-3UA0
1SB14-0UA0
PM340 with integrated line filter
6SL3210–
1SB11-0AA0
1SB12-3AA0
1SB14-0AA0
Circuit breaker type designation
UL489 / CSA C22.2 No. 5-02
Rated current
Rated short-circuit current SCCR
A
kA
5SJ4206-7HG41
6
14
5SJ4210-7HG41
10
14
5SJ4216-7HG41
16
14
Resistance value of the external
braking resistor
Ω
> 180
> 180
> 180
Max. cable length to braking
resistor
m
15
15
15
Line supply connection
L, N
Motor connection
U2, V2, W2
Screw-type terminals for cable cross-sections 1.0 to 2.5 mm2
DC link connection, connection for
braking resistor DCP/R1, DCN, R2
PE connection
at the housing with M 4 screw
Max. motor cable length 3)
(without external options)
m
50 (shielded)
75 (unshielded)
Degree of protection
IP20 or IPXXB
Weight
kg
1.2
1.3
1.3
1) Rated output of a typical standard induction motor at 230 V.
2) The input current depends on the motor load and line impedance. The input currents apply for unit rating loading (based
on Irated) for a line impedance corresponding to uk = 1%.
3) Max. motor cable length 15 m (shielded) for PM340 Power Modules with integrated line filter to comply with the limit
values of EN 61800-3 Category C2.
Table 3- 10
Technical data PM340, 3-ph. AC, Part 1
Line supply voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC ±10%
PM340
6SL3210-
1SE11-3UA0
1SE11-7UA0
1SE12-2UA0
1SE13-1UA0
1SE14-1UA0
PM340 with integrated line
filter
-
-
-
-
-
-
FSA
FSA
FSA
FSA
FSA
Frame size
Output current
Rated current In
Base-load current IH
for S6 operation (40%) ls6
Peak current lmax
A
A
A
A
1.3
1.1
1.3
2.6
1.7
1.5
2.0
3.4
2.2
1.9
2.5
4.4
3.1
2.7
3.5
6.2
4.1
3.6
4.5
8.2
Unit rating 1)
on basis of In
on basis of IH
kW
kW
0.37
0.37
0.55
0.55
0.75
0.75
1.1
1.1
1.5
1.5
Rated pulse frequency
kHz
4
4
4
4
4
Power loss
kW
0.10
0.10
0.10
0.11
0.11
Cooling air requirement
m3/s
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
0.005
Sound pressure level LpA
(1 m)
dB(A)
< 45
< 45
< 45
< 45
< 45
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
91
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
Line supply voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC ±10%
PM340
6SL3210-
1SE11-3UA0
1SE11-7UA0
1SE12-2UA0
1SE13-1UA0
1SE14-1UA0
PM340 with integrated line
filter
-
-
-
-
-
-
24 V DC supply
for the Control Unit
A
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Rated input current 2)
without/with integrated line
reactor
A
1.3 / 1.7
1.7 / 2.2
2.2 / 2.6
3.1 / 3.9
4.1 / 4.8
Class J UL safety fuses
Rated current
Rated short-circuit current
SCCR
A
kA
4
65
4
65
6
65
8
65
10
65
Safety fuses NH
Rated current
A
3NA3 804
4
3NA3 804
4
3NA3 801
6
3NA3 803
10
3NA3 803
10
A
3RV10211DA10
2.2 - 3.2
3RV10211DA10
2.2 - 3.2
3RV10211FA10
3.5 - 5
3RV10211GA10
4.5 - 6.3
3RV10211HA10
5.5 - 8
Ω
> 390
> 390
> 390
> 390
> 390
15
15
15
15
15
Circuit breaker type
designation EN 60947
Rated current
Resistance value of the
external braking resistor
Max. cable length to braking m
resistor
Line supply connection
L1, L2, L3
Motor connection
U2, V2, W2
Screw terminals for
cable cross-sections 1.0 to 2.5 mm2
DC link connection,
connection for braking
resistor
DCP/R1, DCN, R2
PE connection
at the housing with M 4 screw
length 3)
Max. motor cable
shielded/unshielded
m
Degree of protection
Weight
50 / 75
IP20 or IPXXB
kg
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1) Rated output of a typical standard induction motor at 400 V 3-ph. AC.
2) The input current depends on the motor load and line impedance. The input currents apply for unit rating loading (based
on Irated) for a line impedance corresponding to uk = 1%.
3) Max. motor cable length 25 m (shielded) for PM340 Power Modules with integrated line filter to comply with the limit
values of EN 61800-3 Category C2.
Manual
92
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
Table 3- 11
Technical data PM340, 3-ph. AC, Part 2
Line supply voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC ±10%
PM340
6SL3210-
1SE16-0UA0
1SE17-7UA0
1SE21-0UA0
1SE21-8UA0
1SE22-5UA0
PM340 with integrated line
filter
6SL3210-
1SE16-0AA0
1SE17-7AA0
1SE21-0AA0
1SE21-8AA0
1SE22-5AA0
FSB
FSB
FSB
FSC
FSC
Frame size
Output current
Rated current In
Base-load current IH
for S6 operation (40%) ls6
Peak current lmax
A
A
A
A
5.9
5.2
6.4
11.8
7.7
6.8
8.3
15.4
10.2
9.1
10.8
20.4
18
14
19.6
26.4
25
21
27.8
38
Unit rating 1)
on basis of In
on basis of IH
kW
kW
2.2
2.2
3
3
4
4
7.5
5.5
11
7.5
Rated pulse frequency
kHz
4
4
4
4
4
Power loss
kW
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.24
0.30
Cooling air requirement
m3/s
0.009
0.009
0.009
0.038
0.038
Sound pressure level LpA
(1 m)
dB
< 50
< 50
< 50
< 60
< 60
24 V DC supply
for the Control Unit
A
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Rated input current 2)
without/with integrated line
reactor
A
5.6 / 6.7
7.5 / 8.9
9.8 / 12.4
17.1 / 23.1
24.6 / 32.6
A
kA
10
65
12
65
15
65
25
65
35
65
A
3NA3 803
10
3NA3 805
16
3NA3 805
16
3NA3 810
25
3NA3 814
35
A
3RV10211KA10
9 - 12.5
3RV10214AA10
11 - 16
3RV10214BA10
14 - 20
3RV10314EA10
22 - 32
3RV10314FA10
28 - 40
Resistance value
of the external braking
resistor
Ω
> 160
> 160
> 160
> 56
> 56
Max. cable length
to braking resistor
m
15
15
15
15
15
Class J UL safety fuses
Rated current
Rated short-circuit current
SCCR
Safety fuses NH
Rated current
Circuit breaker type
designation EN 60947
Rated current
Line supply connection
L1, L2, L3
Motor connection
U2, V2, W2
Screw terminals for
cable cross-sections 1.0 to 6 mm2
DC link connection,
connection for braking
resistor
DCP/R1, DCN, R2
PE connection
Max. motor cable length
shielded/unshielded
Screw terminals for
cable cross-sections 2.5 to 10
mm2
at the housing with M 5 screw
3)
m
50 / 75
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
93
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
Line supply voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC ±10%
PM340
6SL3210-
1SE16-0UA0
1SE17-7UA0
1SE21-0UA0
1SE21-8UA0
1SE22-5UA0
PM340 with integrated line
filter
6SL3210-
1SE16-0AA0
1SE17-7AA0
1SE21-0AA0
1SE21-8AA0
1SE22-5AA0
4.0
4.0
6.5
6.5
Degree of protection
Weight
IP20 or IPXXB
kg
4.0
1) Rated output of a typical standard induction motor at 400 V 3-ph. AC.
2) The input current depends on the motor load and line impedance. The input currents apply for unit rating loading (based
on Irated) for a line impedance corresponding to uk = 1%.
3) Max. motor cable length 25 m (shielded) for PM340 Power Modules with integrated line filter to comply with the limit
values of EN 61800-3 Category C2.
Table 3- 12
Technical data PM340, 3-ph. AC, Part 3
Line supply voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC ±10%
PM340
6SL3210-
1SE23-2UA0
1SE23-8UA0
1SE24-5UA0
1SE26-0UA0
1SE27-5UA0
PM340 with integrated line
filter
6SL3210-
1SE23-2AA0
1SE23-8AA0
1SE24-5AA0
1SE26-0AA0
1SE27-5AA0
FSC
FSD
FSD
FSD
FSE
Frame size
Output current
Rated current In
Base-load current IH
for S6 operation (40%) ls6
Peak current lmax
A
A
A
A
32
27
37.1
52
38
33
49
64
45
40
58
76
60
48
78
90
75
65
98
124
Unit rating 1)
on basis of In
on basis of IH
kW
kW
15
11
18.5
15
22
18.5
30
22
37
30
Rated pulse frequency
kHz
4
4
4
4
4
Power loss
kW
0.40
0.38
0.51
0.69
0.99
Cooling air requirement
l/s
54.9
54.9
54.9
54.9
2 x 54.9
Sound pressure level LpA
(1 m)
dB(A)
< 60
< 60
< 60
< 60
< 60
24 V DC supply
for the Control Unit
A
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Rated input current2)
without/with integrated line
reactor
A
33 / 39
40 / 46
47 / 53
63 / 72
78 / 88
Class J UL safety fuses
Rated current
Rated short-circuit current
SCCR
A
kA
45
65
50
65
60
65
90
65
100
65
Safety fuses NH
Rated current
A
3NA3 817
40
3NA3 820
50
3NA3 822
63
3NA3 824
80
3NA3 830
100
A
3RV10314HA10
40 - 50
3RV10424JA10
45 - 63
3RV10424KA10
57 - 75
3RV10424MA10
80 - 100
3VL17121DD33-0AA0
100 - 125
Circuit breaker type
designation EN 60947
Rated current
Manual
94
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
Line supply voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC ±10%
PM340
6SL3210-
1SE23-2UA0
1SE23-8UA0
1SE24-5UA0
1SE26-0UA0
1SE27-5UA0
PM340 with integrated line
filter
6SL3210-
1SE23-2AA0
1SE23-8AA0
1SE24-5AA0
1SE26-0AA0
1SE27-5AA0
--
--
--
3VL21913KN30-0AA0
3VL21103KN30-0AA0
90
65
100
65
Circuit breaker type
designation
UL489 /
CSA C22.2 No. 5-02
Rated current
Rated short-circuit current
SCCR
A
kA
Resistance value
of the external braking
resistor
Ω
> 56
> 27
> 27
> 27
> 15
Max. cable length
to braking resistor
m
15
15
15
15
15
Line supply connection
L1, L2, L3
Screw
terminals for
cable crosssection 2.5 to
10 mm2
Motor connection
U2, V2, W2
DC link connection,
connection for braking
resistor
DCP/R1, DCN, R2
PE connection
Max. motor cable length 3)
shielded/unshielded
Stud M6,
connectable cable cross-sections 10 to 50 mm2
at the housing at the housing with M6 screw
with M 5
screw
m
Degree of protection
50 / 75
70 / 100
IP20 or IPXXB
Height
PM340 without/with
integrated line filter
mm
333.4 (13.12)
418.3 (16.47)
/ 511 (20.11)
418.3 (16.47)
/ 511 (20.11)
418.3 (16.47)
/ 511 (20.11)
498.3 (19.62)
/ 633 (24.92)
Weight
without/with integrated line
filter
kg
6.5 / 6.5
15.9 / 19.3
15.9 / 19.3
15.9 / 19.3
19.8 / 27.1
1) Rated output of a typical standard induction motor at 400 V 3-ph. AC.
2) The input current depends on the motor load and line impedance. The input currents apply for unit rating loading (based
on Irated) for a line impedance corresponding to uk = 1%.
3) Max. motor cable length 25 m (shielded) for PM340 Power Modules with integrated line filter to comply with the limit
values of EN 61800-3 Category C2.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
95
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
Table 3- 13
Technical data PM340, 3-ph. AC, Part 4
Line supply voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC ±10%
PM340
6SL3210-
1SE31-0UA0
1SE31-1UA0
1SE31-5UA0
1SE31-8UA0
PM340 with integrated line
filter
6SL3210-
1SE31-0AA0
1SE31-1AA0
1SE31-5AA0
1SE31-8AA0
FSE
FSF
FSF
FSF
Frame size
Output current
Rated current In
Base-load current IH
for S6 operation (40%) ls6
Peak current lmax
A
A
A
A
90
80
117
150
110
95
143
180
145
115
188
220
178
155
231
290
Unit rating 1)
on basis of In
on basis of IH
kW
kW
45
37
55
45
75
55
90
75
Rated pulse frequency
kHz
4
4
4
4
Power loss
kW
1.21
1.42
1.93
2.31
Cooling air requirement
l/s
2 x 54.9
150
150
150
Sound pressure level LpA
(1 m)
dB
62
< 60
< 60
65
24 V DC supply
for the Control Unit
A
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
A
94 / 105
115 / 129
151 / 168
186 / 204
A
kA
125
65
150
65
200
65
250
65
A
3NA3 832
125
3NA3 836
160
3NA3 140
200
3NA3 144
250
3VL1716-1DD330AA0
3VL3720-1DC360AA0
3VL3720-1DC360AA0
3VL3725-1DC360AA0
125 - 160
160 - 200
160 - 200
200 - 250
3VL2112-3KN300AA0
3VL2115-3KN300AA0
3VL3120-3KN300AA0
3VL3125-3KN300AA0
A
kA
125
65
150
65
200
65
250
65
Resistance value
of the external braking
resistor
Ω
> 15
> 8.2
> 8.2
> 8.2
Max. cable length
to braking resistor
m
15
15
15
15
Rated input current 2)
without/with integrated line
reactor
Class J UL safety fuses
Rated current
Rated short-circuit current
SCCR
Safety fuses NH
Rated current
Circuit breaker type
designation
EN 60947
Rated current
Circuit breaker type
designation
UL489 /
CSA C22.2 No. 5-02
Rated current
Rated short-circuit current
SCCR
A
Manual
96
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
Line supply voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC ±10%
PM340
6SL3210-
1SE31-0UA0
1SE31-1UA0
1SE31-5UA0
1SE31-8UA0
PM340 with integrated line
filter
6SL3210-
1SE31-0AA0
1SE31-1AA0
1SE31-5AA0
1SE31-8AA0
Stud M6,
connectable cable
cross-sections 10
to 50 mm2
Stud M8,
max. connection cable cross-section 120 mm2
Line supply connection
L1, L2, L3
Motor connection
U2, V2, W2
DC link connection,
connection for braking
resistor
DCP/R1, DCN, R2
PE connection
at the housing with at the housing with M8 screw
M6 screw
Max. motor cable length 3)
shielded/unshielded
m
70 / 100
Degree of protection
IP20 or IPXXB
Height
PM340 without/with
integrated line filter
mm
498.3 (19.62) / 633 634 (24.96) /
(24.92)
934 (36.77)
634 (24.96) /
934 (36.77)
634 (24.96) /
934 (36.77)
Weight
without/with integrated line
filter
kg
19.8 / 27.1
50.7 / 66.7
50.7 / 66.7
50.7 / 66.7
1) Rated output of a typical standard induction motor at 400 V 3-ph. AC.
2) The input current depends on the motor load and line impedance. The input currents apply for unit rating loading (based
on Irated) for a line impedance corresponding to uk = 1%.
3) Max. motor cable length 25 m (shielded) for PM340 Power Modules with integrated line filter to comply with the limit
values of EN 61800-3 Category C2.
3.1.7.2
Characteristics
Overload capability
,
,PD[
,Q
V
V
Figure 3-20
W
Duty cycle with initial load (for servo drives)
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
97
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
,
,PD[
,Q
V
W
V
Figure 3-21
Duty cycle without initial load (for servo drives)
,
,PD[
,V
,Q
[,Q
PLQ
PLQ
W
Figure 3-22
S6 duty cycle with initial load (for servo drives)
,
,PD[
,V
,Q
[,Q
V
V
Figure 3-23
W
Duty cycle with initial load (for servo drives)
Manual
98
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
[,+
%DVHORDGFXUUHQW,+
,Q
,+
bV
bV
W
Figure 3-24
Duty cycle with 60 s overload with a duty cycle duration of 300 s
[,+
%DVHORDGFXUUHQW,+
,Q
,+
30 s
300 s
t
Figure 3-25
Duty cycle with 30 s overload with a duty cycle duration of 300 s
Note
The short leading edges of the duty cycles shown can only be achieved using speed or
torque control.
Derating characteristic for Power Modules in blocksize format
3HUPLVVLEOHRXWSXWFXUUHQW
N+]
3XOVHIUHTXHQF\
Figure 3-26
Frame sizes FSA to FSE: Output current as a function of the pulse frequency
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
99
3HUPLVVLEOHRXWSXWFXUUHQW
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
N+]
3XOVHIUHTXHQF\
Figure 3-27
Frame size FSF: Output current as a function of the pulse frequency
>@
3HUPLVVLEOHRXWSXWFXUUHQW
Figure 3-28
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH
>r&@
Output current as a function of the ambient temperature
>@
3HUPLVVLEOHRXWSXWFXUUHQW
>P@
,QVWDOODWLRQDOWLWXGHDERYHVHDOHYHO
Figure 3-29
Output current as a function of the installation altitude
Manual
100
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
>@
3HUPLVVLEOHRXWSXWFXUUHQW
>9@
'&OLQNYROWDJH>9@
Figure 3-30
Current derating as a function of the DC-link voltage
At installation altitudes >2000 m, an insolating transformer must be used (see "System
overview/Derating as a function of the installation altitude and ambient temperature"). The
design the secondary line supply system must be as follows:
● TN system with grounded star point (no grounded outer conductor)
● IT system
A reduction of the line supply voltage phase-phase is not necessary.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
101
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
3.1.7.3
Current derating depending on the pulse frequency
Interrelationship between the pulse frequency and current de-rating
Table 3- 14
Order
No.
Current de-rating depending on the pulse frequency
Line
supply
voltage
6SL3210
FSA
1SB110UA0
1-ph.
230 V
AC
Rated
current
Power
(low
overload)
A
[kW]
Output current in A at a pulse frequency of:
4 kHz
6 kHz
85%
8 kHz
12 kHz
70 %
10 kHz
60%
16 kHz
50 %
14 kHz
45%
40 %
0.9
0.12
0.9
0.76
0.63
0.54
0.45
0.40
0.36
1SB123UA0
2.3
0.37
2.3
1.96
1.61
1.38
1.15
1.03
0.92
1SB140UA0
3.9
0.75
3.9
3.31
2.73
2.34
1.95
1.75
1.56
1.3
0.37
1.3
1.10
0.91
1.78
0.65
0.58
0.52
1SE117UA0
1.7
0.55
1.7
1.44
1.19
1.02
0.85
0.76
0.68
1SE122UA0
2.2
0.75
2.2
1.87
1.54
1.32
1.1
0.99
0.88
1SE131UA0
3.1
1.1
3.1
2.63
2.17
1.86
1.55
1.39
1.24
1SE141UA0
4.1
1.5
4.1
3.48
2.87
2.46
2.05
1.84
1.64
1SE160UA0
5.9
2.2
5.9
5.01
4.13
3.54
2.95
2.65
2.36
1SE177UA0
7.7
3
7.7
6.54
5.39
4.62
3.85
3.46
3.08
1SE210UA0
10.2
4
10.2
8.67
7.14
6.12
5.1
4.59
4.08
1SE218UA0
18
5.5
18
15.3
12.6
10.8
9
8.1
7.2
1SE225UA0
25
7.5
25
21.25
17.5
15
12.5
11.25
10
1SE232UA0
32
15
32
27.2
22.4
19.2
16
14.4
12.8
38
18.5
38
32.3
26.6
22.8
19
17.1
15.2
FSA
1SE113UA0
3-ph.
400 V
AC
FSB
FSC
FSD
1SE238UA0
Manual
102
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)
Order
No.
6SL3210
Line
supply
voltage
Rated
current
Power
(low
overload)
A
[kW]
Output current in A at a pulse frequency of:
4 kHz
6 kHz
85%
8 kHz
12 kHz
70 %
10 kHz
60%
16 kHz
50 %
14 kHz
45%
40 %
1SE245UA0
45
22
45
38.25
31.5
27
22.5
20.25
18
1SE260UA0
60
30
60
51
42
36
30
27
24
1SE275UA0
75
37
75
63.75
52.5
45
37.5
33.75
30
1SE310UA0
90
45
90
76.5
63
54
45
40.5
36
1SE311UA0
110
55
110
93.5
77
-
-
-
-
1SE315UA0
145
75
145
123.3
101.5
-
-
-
-
1SE318UA0
178
90
178
151.3
124.6
-
-
-
-
FSE
FSF
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
103
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
3.2
Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
3.2.1
Description
The Power Modules in Blocksize Liquid Cooled format (frame sizes FSD - FSF) are
designed as follows:
● Line-side diode rectifier
● DC link electrolytic capacitors with pre-charging circuit
● Output inverter
● Braking chopper for (external) braking resistor
● 24 V DC / 1 A power supply
● Gating unit, actual value acquisition
● Internal liquid cooling
The Blocksize Liquid Cooled Power Modules cover the power range from 18.5 kW to
90.0 kW and are available without an integrated line filter.
Table 3- 15
Overview of Liquid Cooled Power Modules PM340
Power Module frame size FSD Liquid Cooled
Power Module frame size FSE Liquid Cooled
Manual
104
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
Power Module frame size FSF Liquid Cooled
3.2.2
Safety information
CAUTION
During transport and during storage, Power Modules must be protected against mechanical
shock and vibration. It is also important to protect the unit against water (rain) and against
excessively high/excessively low temperatures.
Note
Connection authorization
Power Modules have been designed for use in the industrial environment and generate
current harmonics on the line side as a result of the rectifier circuit.
When a machine with integrated Power Modules is connected to the public network,
authorization is required from the local power supply company if the rated input current of the
machine does not fulfill the requirements of EN 61000-3-2 with respect to current harmonics.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
105
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
WARNING
In a residential environment this product can cause radio disturbances, which may make
interference-suppression measures necessary.
DANGER
Grounding/protective grounding of the Power Module
The Power Module housing must always be grounded. If the Power Module is not correctly
grounded, then extremely hazardous states can occur, which under certain circumstances,
can result in death.
DANGER
It must be checked as to whether the Power Module is designed for the correct power
supply - higher supply voltages may not be connected to the Power Module.
DANGER
After connecting the line and motor feeder cables to the appropriate terminals, check that
the front covers (only frame sizes FSD to FSF) are closed and latched. Only then may the
Power Module be connected to the power supply.
NOTICE
For a UL-approved system use UL-approved cables only.
DANGER
Once all the supply voltages have been disconnected, a hazardous voltage may be present
in the power unit for up to 5 minutes. The cover for the terminals may only be opened after
this time has definitely elapsed.
When opening the protective cover, you must activate the release. A suitable tool (e.g.
screwdriver) must be used for this purpose.
Damaged components must not be used, otherwise this could result in secondary damage
or accidents.
Manual
106
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
DANGER
The drive components generate high leakage currents in the protective conductor. The
components must only be operated in cabinets or in closed electrical operating areas and
must be connected with the protective conductor. To protect against electric shock, the
protective conductor connection on the cabinet or machine must be implemented in
accordance with one of the following measures:
 stationary connection and protective conductor connection by means of ≥ 10 mm2 Cu or
≥ 16 mm2 Al
 stationary connection and automatic shutdown of the power supply if the protective
conductor is interrupted
DANGER
The hazard warning in the local language for the DC link discharge time must be affixed to
the component. A set of labels bearing this warning in 16 languages is provided with the
component.
WARNING
Power Modules must be mounted in the vertical position.
For the Liquid Cooled Power Modules, a cooling clearance of 300 mm (11.81 inch) must be
maintained above and below the component.
Cooling clearances of 30 mm (1.18 inch) must be observed in front of the component.
Devices that could restrict the cooling air flow may not be mounted/installed in this area.
It must be carefully ensured that the cooling air flow of the Power Modules can flow
unrestricted.
Note
The Power Modules with frame sizes FSD, FSE, and FSF can be mounted without any
lateral clearance.
DANGER
Cable shields and unused power cable conductors (e.g. brake conductors) must be
connected to PE potential to prevent capacitive cross-talk charges.
Non-observance can cause lethal shock voltages.
WARNING
The equipment must be safely disconnected from the supply before any installation or
service work is carried out on cooling circuit components.
The cooling circuit may only be connected by a trained specialist.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
107
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
3.2.3
Interface description
3.2.3.1
Overview
3RZHU0RGXOH
,QWHUIDFH30,)
/LQHFRQQHFWLRQ
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
IRUWKHOLQHVXSSO\FDEOH
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
'&OLQN
FRQQHFWLRQ'&3'&1
5HWXUQIORZ
VXSSO\ZLWKLQWHJUDWHG
RULILFHSODWH
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU55
Figure 3-31
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQIRUWKH
PRWRUFDEOH
&RQQHFWLRQWRWKHRSWLRQPRGXOH
%UDNH&RQWURO
DWWKHORZHUVLGHRIWKH3RZHU0RGXOH
Liquid Cooled Power Module PM340 (Example: Frame size FSD)
Manual
108
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
3.2.3.2
Connection example
SKWR9$&
/// 3(
3(
8/
9/
:/
/LQHUHDFWRU
3RZHU
0RGXOH
30
%ORFNVL]H
/LTXLG
&RROHG
30,)LQWHUIDFHWR
&RQWURO8QLW&8
3
5
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
'&35
˩3
8
9
:
3(
'&1
9'&
SRZHU
VXSSO\
IRUEUDNH
Figure 3-32
6DIH
%UDNH
5HOD\
0
a
7KHEUDNLQJUHVLVWRUFRQQHFWLRQPXVWEHVKLHOGHG
Connection example, Liquid Cooled Power Module PM340, 3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
109
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
Arrangement of the line and motor terminals
The following diagram shows the arrangement of the line and motor terminals for PM340
Power Modules (frame sizes FSD to FSF). The diagram also includes the terminal tightening
torques.
)UDPHVL]HV)6')6(
01P
)UDPHVL]H)6)
01P
)UDPHVL]HV)6'WR)6)
Figure 3-33
3.2.3.3
Table 3- 16
Arrangement of the line supply and motor terminals for the PM340
Line supply connection
Terminal block, line supply connection 3-ph. 380 V - 480 V AC
Terminal
Signal name
Technical specifications
1
U1/L1
External conductor L1
2
V1/L2
External conductor L2
3
W1/L3
External conductor L3
4
PE
PE connection
Manual
110
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
3.2.3.4
Table 3- 17
Braking resistor and DC link connection
Terminal block, braking resistor, and DC link connection
Terminal
3.2.3.5
Table 3- 18
Technical specifications
DCN
DC link negative
DCP/R1
DC link positive and positive connection for braking resistor
R2
Negative connection for the braking resistor
Motor connection
Terminal block, motor connection 380 V - 480 V 3 AC
Terminal
Technical specifications
PE connection
3.2.3.6
Table 3- 19
U2
Motor phase U
V2
Motor phase V
W2
Motor phase W
Connection to the option module, brake control
Connector
Terminal
Designation
Technical specifications
1
Low
Low signal, option module brake control at PM340
2
High
High signal, option module brake control at PM340
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
111
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
Dimension drawings
3.2.4
0FRQQHFWLRQV
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P
3LSHWKUHDG,62*
Figure 3-34
Dimension drawing of Liquid Cooled Power Module PM340, frame size FSD, all dimensions in mm and
(inches)
Manual
112
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
0FRQQHFWLRQV
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P
3LSHWKUHDG,62*
Figure 3-35
Dimension drawing of Liquid Cooled Power Module PM340, frame size FSE, all dimensions in mm and
(inches)
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
113
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
0FRQQHFWLRQV
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P
+RVHFRQQHFWLRQIRU
GUDLQLQJFRQGHQVDWH
3LSHWKUHDG,62*
Figure 3-36
3.2.5
Dimension drawing of Liquid Cooled Power Module PM340, frame size FSF, all dimensions in mm and
(inches)
Installation
The coolant hoses should be connected before the devices are installed.
Manual
114
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
3.2.5.1
Drilling patterns
Hole drilling templates for frame sizes FSD to FSF
PP
PP
šPP
PP
PP
šPP
šPP
PP
PP
PP
)UDPHVL]H)6'
)UDPHVL]H)6(
)UDPHVL]H)6)
Figure 3-37
Hole drilling templates for frame sizes FSD to FSF
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
115
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
3.2.5.2
Installation
LQWHJUDWHGFRROLQJXQLW
0RXQWLQJZDOO
0VFUHZVWXGV
,QOHW
5HWXUQ
IORZ
3ODLQZDVKHU
0QXW
Figure 3-38
WRRWKORFN
ZDVKHU
Installation of Power Module PM340 Liquid Cooled with integrated cooling unit (example:
frame size FSE)
The connections for the coolant are on the underside.
Water connection thread type: Pipe thread ISO 228 G ½ B.
Manual
116
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
3.2.5.3
Access to the power supply terminals and motor terminals
For frame sizes FSD to FSF, the terminals are accessed by releasing the tongue at the side
of the terminal covers using a suitable flat screwdriver. The cover can then be pushed
upwards and engaged in this position as shown in the following diagram.
Figure 3-39
Access to the line and motor terminals for frame sizes FSD to FSF
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
117
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
DANGER
Once the terminal cover has been removed, the degree of protection of the Power Module
is reduced to IP00.
3.2.6
Connection to the cooling circuit
The coolant connection for SINAMICS units is established by means of a 1/2'' screwed joint.
The supply and return lines must be connected using a flexible, non-conductive hose, in
order to
● Prevent electrochemical corrosion,
● Reduce the transmission of vibrations, and
● Dampen pressure transients in the coolant.
The hose should be about 1.5 m in length (total of supply and return lines).
For information about the coolant and the configuration of the cooling circuit, refer to the
chapter titled "Cooling circuit and coolant properties".
3.2.7
Commissioning
Prior to commissioning
Once the devices have been installed and before they are commissioned, the cooling circuit
must be checked for leaks.
After commissioning
The recommended servicing procedure for the cooling circuit is to check the fill level and the
coolant for discoloration or cloudiness at least once a year.
If the coolant level has dropped, the loss should be corrected on closed or semi-open circuits
with a prepared mixture of distilled water and inhibitor or Antifrogen N.
Manual
118
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
3.2.8
Table 3- 20
Technical data
Technical data Blocksize Liquid Cooled PM340, Part 1
PM340 Power Module
6SL3215-
Frame size
1SE23-8UAx
1SE26-0UAx
1SE27-5UAx
FSD
FSD
FSE
Output current
Rated current In
Base-load current IH
for S6 operation (40%) ls6
Peak current lmax
A
A
A
A
38
33
49
64
60
48
78
90
75
65
98
124
Unit rating 1)
on basis of In
on basis of IH
kW
kW
18.5
15
30
22
37
30
Rated pulse frequency
kHz
4
4
4
Power loss
total, approx.
to ambient air, approx.
kW
kW
0.38
0.09
0.69
0.13
0.99
0.16
l/min
8
8
8
Liquid volume of integrated heat
exchanger
l
0.1
0.1
0.13
Sound pressure level LpA (1 m)
dB
< 60
< 60
< 60
24 V DC supply
for the Control Unit
A
1.0
1.0
1.0
Rated input current 2)
without/with integrated line reactor
A
40 / 46
63 / 72
78 / 88
Cooling circuit
Rated volumetric flow for water at
70 kPa pressure drop
Class J UL safety fuses
Rated current
Rated short-circuit current SCCR
A
kA
50
65
90
65
100
65
Safety fuses NH
Rated current
A
3NA3 820
50
3NA3 824
80
3NA3 830
100
3RV1042-4JA10
3RV1042-4MA10
Circuit breaker type designation
EN 60947
Rated current
Circuit breaker type designation
UL489 / CSA C22.2 No. 5-02
Rated current
Rated short-circuit current SCCR
A
45 - 63
80 - 100
3VL1712-1DD330AA0
100 - 125
--
3VL2191-3KN300AA0
90
65
3VL2110-3KN300AA0
100
65
A
kA
Resistance value
of the external braking resistor
Ω
> 27
> 27
> 15
Max. cable length
to braking resistor
m
15
15
15
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
119
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
PM340 Power Module
6SL3215-
1SE23-8UAx
1SE26-0UAx
1SE27-5UAx
Line supply connection
L1, L2, L3
Motor connection
U2, V2, W2
Stud M6,
connectable cable cross-sections 10 to 50 mm2for ring cable lugs
DC link connection, connection for
braking resistor
DCP/R1, DCN, R2
PE connection
Max. motor cable length
M6 studs
m
70 (shielded) / 100 (unshielded)
Degree of protection
IP20 or IPXXB
Depth
- PM340
- PM340 with CU305 PN
- PM340 with CU305 DP/CAN
mm
mm
mm
Weight
with CU305
kg
kg
159.5 (6.28)
229.4 (9.03)
214.1 (8.43)
10.5
11.5
10.5
11.5
14.8
15.8
1) Rated output of a typical standard induction motor at 400 V 3-ph. AC
2) The input current depends on the motor load and line impedance. The input currents apply for unit rating loading (based
on Irated) for a line impedance corresponding to uk = 1%
Table 3- 21
Technical data PM340 Blocksize Liquid Cooled, Part 2
PM340 Power Module
6SL3215-
Frame size
1SE31-0UAx
1SE31-1UAx
1SE31-8UAx
FSE
FSF
FSF
Output current
Rated current In
Base-load current IH
for S6 operation (40%) ls6
Peak current lmax
A
A
A
A
90
80
117
150
110
95
143
180
178
155
231
290
Unit rating 1)
on basis of In
on basis of IH
kW
kW
45
37
55
45
90
75
Rated pulse frequency
kHz
4
4
4
Power loss
total, approx.
to ambient air, approx.
kW
kW
1.21
0.19
1.42
0.21
2.31
0.35
l/min
8
8
8
Liquid volume of integrated heat
exchanger
l
0.13
0.2
0.2
Sound pressure level LpA (1 m)
dB
62
< 60
65
24 V DC supply
for the Control Unit
A
1.0
1.0
1.0
A
94 / 105
115 / 129
186 / 204
Cooling circuit
Rated volumetric flow for water at
70 kPa pressure drop
Rated input current 2)
without/with integrated line reactor
Manual
120
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
PM340 Power Module
6SL3215-
1SE31-0UAx
1SE31-1UAx
1SE31-8UAx
Class J UL safety fuses
Rated current
Rated short-circuit current SCCR
A
kA
125
65
150
65
250
65
Safety fuses NH
Rated current
A
3NA3 832
125
3NA3 836
160
3NA3 144
250
A
3VL1716-1DD330AA0
125 - 160
3VL3720-1DC360AA0
160 - 200
3VL3725-1DC360AA0
200 - 250
A
kA
3VL2112-3KN300AA0
125
65
3VL2115-3KN300AA0
150
65
3VL3125-3KN300AA0
250
65
Resistance value
of the external braking resistor
Ω
> 15
> 8.2
> 8.2
Max. cable length
to braking resistor
m
15
15
15
Circuit breaker type designation
EN 60947
Rated current
Circuit breaker type designation
UL489 / CSA C22.2 No. 5-02
Rated current
Rated short-circuit current SCCR
Line supply connection
L1, L2, L3
Motor connection
U2, V2, W2
Stud M6,
Stud M8,
connectable cable
max. connection cable cross-section
cross-sections 10 to 120 mm2
50 mm2 for ring cable
lugs
DC link connection, connection for
braking resistor
DCP/R1, DCN, R2
PE connection
Max. motor cable length
m
70 (shielded) / 100 (unshielded)
Degree of protection
IP20 or IPXXB
Depth
- PM340
- PM340 with CU305 PN
- PM340 with CU305 DP/CAN
mm
mm
mm
159.5 (6.28)
229.4 (9.03)
214.1 (8.43)
241.5 (9.50)
311.4 (12.26)
296.1 (11.66)
241.5 (9.50)
311.4 (12.26)
296.1 (11.66)
Weight
with CU305
kg
kg
14.8
15.8
29.2
30.2
29.2
30.2
1) Rated output of a typical standard induction motor at 400 V 3-ph. AC.
2) The input current depends on the motor load and line impedance. The input currents apply for unit rating loading (based
on Irated) for a line impedance corresponding to uk = 1%.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
121
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
3.2.8.1
Characteristics
Overload capability
,
,PD[
,Q
V
W
V
Figure 3-40
Duty cycle with initial load (for servo drives)
,
,PD[
,Q
V
V
Figure 3-41
W
Duty cycle without initial load (for servo drives)
,
,PD[
,V
,Q
[,Q
PLQ
PLQ
W
Figure 3-42
S6 duty cycle with initial load (for servo drives)
Manual
122
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
,
,PD[
,V
,Q
[,Q
V
W
V
Figure 3-43
Duty cycle with initial load (for servo drives)
[,+
%DVHORDGFXUUHQW,+
,Q
,+
bV
bV
W
Figure 3-44
Duty cycle with 60 s overload with a duty cycle duration of 300 s
[,+
%DVHORDGFXUUHQW,+
,Q
,+
30 s
300 s
t
Figure 3-45
Duty cycle with 30 s overload with a duty cycle duration of 300 s
Note
The short leading edges of the duty cycles shown can only be achieved using speed or
torque control.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
123
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
3HUPLVVLEOHRXWSXWFXUUHQW
Derating characteristics for Power Modules in blocksize Liquid Cooled format
N+]
3XOVHIUHTXHQF\
Frame sizes FSD and FSE: Output current as a function of the pulse frequency
3HUPLVVLEOHRXWSXWFXUUHQW
Figure 3-46
N+]
3XOVHIUHTXHQF\
Figure 3-47
Frame size FSF: Output current as a function of the pulse frequency
3HUPLVVLEOHRXWSXWFXUUHQW
>@
Figure 3-48
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH
>r&@
Output current as a function of the ambient temperature
Manual
124
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
>@
3HUPLVVLEOHRXWSXWFXUUHQW
>P@
,QVWDOODWLRQDOWLWXGHDERYHVHDOHYHO
Figure 3-49
Output current as a function of the installation altitude
>@
3HUPLVVLEOHRXWSXWFXUUHQW
>9@
'&OLQNYROWDJH>9@
Figure 3-50
Current derating as a function of the DC-link voltage
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
125
3HUPLVVLEOHRXWSXWFXUUHQW
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Blocksize Liquid Cooled (PM340)
r&
&RRODQWWHPSHUDWXUH
:LWKDQWLIUHH]H
:LWKRXWDQWLIUHH]H
Figure 3-51
Current derating as a function of the ambient temperature
At installation altitudes >2000 m, an insolating transformer must be used (see "System
overview/Derating as a function of the installation altitude and ambient temperature").
The design the secondary line supply system must be as follows:
● TN system with grounded star point (no grounded outer conductor)
● IT system
A reduction of the line supply voltage phase-phase is not necessary.
Manual
126
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
DC link components
4.1
Braking resistors
4.1.1
Description
4
The PM340 Power Modules cannot regenerate into the line supply. For regenerative
operation, e.g. the braking of a rotating mass, a braking resistor must be connected to
convert the resulting energy into heat.
A thermostatic switch monitors the braking resistor for overtemperature and issues a signal
on a floating contact if the limit value is exceeded.
4.1.2
Safety information
CAUTION
The surface temperature of the braking resistors may exceed 80 °C.
The braking resistor is connected directly on the Power Module at the terminals DCP/R1 and
R2.
The braking resistor must be protected against overheating. A thermoswitch handles this
protective function (included in the scope of supply of each breaking resistor). There are two
ways of using this thermoswitch to protect the braking resistor.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
127
DC link components
4.1 Braking resistors
Connect the thermoswitch to a Control Unit
Connect the thermoswitch to a free digital input of the Control Unit. If the braking resistor
overheats, the Power Module is disconnected from the power supply. Then, the digital input
must be assigned to enable deactivation using an OFF2 command.
3(
/
/
/
//
1/
/
&RQWURO8QLW
'&35
3RZHU0RGXOH
7
7
5
5
Figure 4-1
7KHUPRVWDWLFVZLWFK
%UDNLQJ
UHVLVWRU
2))
', 9
5
Connecting the thermoswitch on the braking resistor to a Control Unit
Connect the thermoswitch to a contactor
Establish the power supply to the Power Modules through a contactor which can then shut
down the power supply when the resistor overheats. The thermoswitch is connected in
series with the coil feeder cable for the line contactor. The contacts of the thermoswitch
switch close again as soon as the temperature of the braking resistor has fallen below the
selected value.
9'&
3(
/
/
/
9$&
0D[
&RQWDFWRU
//
1/
/
3RZHU0RGXOH
5
Figure 4-2
5
%UDNLQJ
UHVLVWRU
'&35
5
7
7
7KHUPRVWDWLFVZLWFK
Connecting the thermoswitch on the braking resistor to a contactor
Manual
128
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
DC link components
4.1 Braking resistors
4.1.3
Dimension drawings
:
/
/
'
:
Figure 4-3
Dimension drawing of braking resistor, frame sizes FSA and FSB
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
129
DC link components
4.1 Braking resistors
Figure 4-4
Table 4- 1
Dimension drawing of braking resistor, frame sizes FSC, FSD, FSE, FSF
Dimensions of braking resistor, all data in mm and (inches), Part 1
Order number
6SE6400-4BC050AA0
6SE6400-4BD110AA0
6SL3201-0BE120AA0
6SE6400-4BD165CA0
Frame size
FSA
FSA
FSB
FSC
L
230 (9.05)
230 (9.05)
239 (9.40)
285 (11.22)
L1
217 (8.54)
217 (8.54)
226 (8.89)
200 (7.87)
L2
-
-
-
145 (5.70)
L3
-
-
-
170 (6.69)
D
43.5 (1.71)
43.5 (1.71)
43.5 (1.71)
150 (5.90)
D1
-
-
-
217 (8.54)
D2
-
-
-
185 (7.28)
W
72 (2.83)
72 (2.83)
149 (5.86)
185 (7.28)
W1
56 (2.20)
56 (2.20)
133 (5.24)
230 (9.05)
Manual
130
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
DC link components
4.1 Braking resistors
Table 4- 2
Dimensions of braking resistor, all data in mm and (inches), Part 2
Order number
6SE6400-4BD21-2DA0
6SE6400-4BD22-2EA0
6SE6400-4BD24-0FA0
FSD
FSE
FSF
Frame size
4.1.4
L
515 (20.27)
645 (25.39)
650 (25.59)
L1
350 (13.77)
480 (18.89)
510 (20.07)
L2
205 (8.07)
205 (8.07)
270 (10.62)
L3
195 (7.67)
195 (7.67)
335 (13.18)
D
175 (6.88)
175 (6.88)
315 (12.40)
D1
242 (9.52)
242 (9.52)
382 (15.03)
D2
210 (8.26)
210 (8.26)
382 (15.03)
W
270 (10.62)
270 (10.62)
400 (15.74)
W1
315 (12.40)
315 (12.40)
435 (17.12)
Mounting
The braking resistor is connected at terminals DCP/R1 and R2. Since it generates heat, it
should be mounted to the side of the PM340 Power Modules.
The braking resistors for the FSA and FSB frame sizes are designed as sub-chassis
components. If the PM340 Power Modules of the FSA or FSB frame size are operated
without a line reactor, the braking resistors can also be installed under the Power Modules.
The braking resistors for the Power Modules of the FSC to FSF frame sizes should be
placed outside the control cabinet or the switchgear room in order to direct the resulting heat
loss away from the Power Modules. This reduces the level of air conditioning required.
The braking resistors can be installed horizontally or vertically. The power connections on
vertically installed resistors must be at the bottom.
Note
PE connection
The PE connection for the braking resistor is established via the Screening Kit for frame
sizes FSA to FSF.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
131
DC link components
4.1 Braking resistors
4.1.5
Table 4- 3
Technical data
Technical data, braking resistors, Part 1
Order number
6SE64004BC05-0AA0
6SE64004BD11-0AA0
6SL32010BE12-0AA0
6SE64004BD16-5CA0
Suitable for Power Modules of frame size
FSA
FSA
FSB
FSC
Resistance
Ω
180
390
160
56
Unit rating PDB
kW
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.65
Peak power Pmax
kW
1
1.7
4.0
13
Load duration for peak power Ta
s
27.6
13.8
12.6
13.1
Period duration of braking duty cycle t
s
276
276
252
262
Degree of protection
IP20 or IPXXB
IP20 or IPXXB
IP20 or IPXXB
IP20 or IPXXB
Power connections
Cable
3 x 2.5 mm2
shielded, length
0.5m
Cable
3 x 2.5 mm2
shielded, length
0.5 m
Cable
3 x 2.5 mm2
shielded, length
0.4 m
Cable
3 x 2.5 mm2
shielded, length
0.8 m
Thermoswitch (NC contact)
maximum contact load
connecting cable
250 VAC/2.5 A
250 VAC/2.5 A
250 VAC/2.5 A
250 VAC/2.5 A
1.0
1.0
1.6
3.8
Weight
Table 4- 4
kg
Technical data, braking resistors, Part 2
Order number
6SE6400-
Suitable for Power Modules of frame size
4BD21-2DA0
4BD22-2EA0
4BD24-0FA0
FSD
FSE
FSF
Resistance
Ω
27
15
8.2
Unit rating PDB
kW
1.2
2.2
4.0
Peak power Pmax
kW
24
44
80
Load duration for peak power Ta
s
13.6
14.5
13.1
Period duration of braking duty cycle t
s
271
290
252
IP20 or IPXXB
IP20 or IPXXB
IP20 or IPXXB
Degree of protection
Power connections
M6 studs
M6 studs
M6 studs
Thermoswitch (NC contact)
maximum contact load
connecting cable
250 VAC/2.5 A
250 VAC/2.5 A
250 VAC/2.5 A
7.4
10.6
16.7
Weight
kg
Manual
132
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
DC link components
4.1 Braking resistors
Duty cycles
3
3
PD[
3
'%
7D
Figure 4-5
7
W
Load diagram for the braking resistor, in blocksize format
T [s] period duration of braking duty cycle
Ta [s] load duration for peak power
PDB [W] unit rating of the braking resistor
Pmax [W] peak braking power of the braking resistor
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
133
DC link components
4.1 Braking resistors
Manual
134
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Motor-side power components
5.1
Motor reactors (blocksize)
5.1.1
Description
5
Motor reactors reduce the voltage stress on the motor windings by reducing the voltage
gradients at the motor terminals that occur when motors are fed from drive converters. At the
same time, the capacitive re-charging currents that additionally load the output of the Power
Module when longer motor cables are used are simultaneously reduced.
The motor reactors for Power Modules 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC are suitable for a pulse
frequency of 4 kHz. Higher pulse frequencies are not permissible.
5.1.2
Safety information
WARNING
The 100 mm clearances above and below the components must be observed.
Note
The connecting cables to the Power Module must be kept as short as possible (max. 5 m).
CAUTION
When using motor reactors that SIEMENS has not approved for SINAMICS, then these can
thermally damage the reactor.
CAUTION
The surface temperature of the motor reactors can exceed 80 °C.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible output frequency when motor reactors are used is 150 Hz.
CAUTION
The maximum permissible pulse frequency when motor reactors are used is 4 kHz.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
135
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors (blocksize)
5.1.3
Dimension drawings
&
%
$
Figure 5-1
Dimension drawing: Motor reactor, frame size FSA
Table 5- 1
Total dimensions: Motor reactor, frame size FSA, all data in mm and (inches)
Motor reactor
6SE6400Frame size
3TC00-4AD2
FSA
Dimension A in mm and (inches)
200 (7.87)
Dimension B in mm and (inches)
75.5 (2.97)
Dimension C in mm and (inches)
110 (4.33)
Manual
136
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors (blocksize)
%
&
)UDPHVL]H)6&
%
&
$
$
)UDPHVL]H)6%
Figure 5-2
Table 5- 2
Dimension drawing: Motor reactor, frame sizes FSB and FSC
Total dimensions: Motor reactor, frame sizes FSB and FSC
Motor reactor
0AE21-0CA0
0AJ23-2CA0
FSB
FSC
Dimension A in mm and (inches)
270 (10.62)
334 (13.14)
Dimension B in mm and (inches)
153 (6.02)
189 (7.44)
Dimension C in mm and (inches)
70 (2.75)
50 (1.96)
6SL3202Frame size
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
137
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors (blocksize)
3UHVVXUHHOHPHQWGHVLJQDWLRQSODWHDQGWHUPLQDO
RQO\IRUYHUVLRQZLWKWHPSHUDWXUHPRQLWRULQJ
H
H
H
3URWHFWLYH
HDUWK
FRQGXFWRU
Figure 5-3
E
PD[
0
E
0RXQWLQJKROH
E
E
Dimension drawing: Motor reactor, frame size FSD
H
H
H
E
E
PD[
0
0RXQWLQJKROH
PD[
Figure 5-4
E
E
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
0[
Dimension drawing: Motor reactor, frame size FSE
Manual
138
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors (blocksize)
H
H
H
E
PD[
0
E
E
E
0RXQWLQJKROH
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
0[
Figure 5-5
Dimension drawing: Motor reactor, frame size FSF
Table 5- 3
Total dimensions: Motor reactor, frame sizes FSD, FSE, all data in mm and (inches)
Motor reactor
6SE6400Frame size
3TC05-4DD0
3TC03-8DD0
3TC07-5ED0
3TC08-0ED0
FSD
FSD
FSE
FSE
b1
70 (2.75)
94 (3.70)
101 (3.97)
70 (2.75)
b2
91 (3.58)
115 (4.52)
133 (5.23)
90 (3.54)
b3
70 (2.75)
94 (3.70)
101 (3.97)
70 (2.75)
b4
176 (6.92)
176 (6.92)
200 (7.87)
176 (6.92)
e1
91 (3.58)
103 (4.05)
110 (4.33)
89 ± 2 (3.50 ± 0.07)
e2
57 (2.24)
69 (2.71)
76 (2.99)
79 ± 2 (3.50 ± 0.07)
e3
49 (1.92)
61 (2.40)
68 (2.67)
-
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
139
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors (blocksize)
Table 5- 4
Total dimensions: Motor reactor, frame size FSF, all data in mm and (inches)
Motor reactor
6SE6400-
3TC14-5FD0
3TC15-4FD0
Frame size
FSF
FSF
b1
138 (5.43)
101 (3.97)
b2
169 (6.65)
121 (4.76)
b3
138 (5.43)
101 (3.97)
b4
264 (10.39)
200 (7.87)
e1
131 (5.15)
119 ± 2 (4.68 ± 0.07)
e2
90 (3.54)
109 ± 2 (4.29 ± 0.07)
e3
78 (3.07)
-
Manual
140
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors (blocksize)
5.1.4
Mounting
Note
The motor reactor must be installed as close as possible to the Power Module.
,
+
-
Figure 5-6
Mounting dimensions of motor reactor, frame size FSA
Table 5- 5
Mounting dimensions of motor reactor, frame size FSA, all data in mm and (inches)
Motor reactor 6SE6400Frame size
3TC00-4AD2
FSA
H
160 (6.29)
I
56 (2.20)
J
187 (7.36)
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
141
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors (blocksize)
,
*
)UDPHVL]H)6&
-
+
,
+
)UDPHVL]H)6%
-
Figure 5-7
Mounting dimensions of motor reactors, frame sizes FSB and FSC
Table 5- 6
Mounting dimensions of motor reactors, frame sizes FSB and FSC, all data in mm and
(inches)
Motor reactor
6SL3202-
0AE21-0CA0
0AJ23-2CA0
FSB
FSC
138 (5.43)
174 (6.85)
H
174 (6.85)
204 (8.03)
I
120 (4.72)
156 (6.14)
J
200 (7.87)
232 (9.13)
M4
M5
Frame size
Power Module
Mounting surface
Fixing screw
G
Manual
142
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors (blocksize)
Cable cross-section and terminal tightening torques
Terminals for wiring on site
Frame size
FSA
FSB
FSC
Tightening torque [Nm]
1.1
1.5
2.25
1
1.5
2.5
2.5
6
10
Recommended
minimum conductor cross-section [mm2]
Highest conductor cross-section [mm2]
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
143
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors (blocksize)
Figure 5-8
Mounting dimensions of motor reactors, frame sizes FSD, FSE, FSF
Manual
144
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors (blocksize)
Table 5- 7
Mounting dimensions of motor reactors, frame sizes FSD, FSE, all data in mm and (inches)
Motor reactor
6SE6400-
3TC05-4DD0
3TC03-8DD0
3TC07-5ED0
3TC08-0ED0
FSD
FSD
FSE
FSE
a2
20 (0.78)
20 (0.78)
20 (0.78)
20 (0.78)
a3
4 (0.15)
4 (0.15)
4 (0.15)
4 (0.15)
a4
10 (0.39)
10 (0.39)
10 (0.39)
10 (0.39)
Frame size
Motor reactor
a5
∅6 (0.23)
∅6 (0.23)
∅7 (0.27)
∅7
I4
225 (8.85)
225 (8.85)
270 (10.62)
225 (8.85)
I5
76 ±5 (2.99 ±0.19)
76 ±5 (2.99 ±0.19)
88 ±5 (3.46 ±0.19)
76 ±5 (2.99 ±0.19)
hmax
210 (8.26)
210 (8.26)
248 (9.76)
210 (8.26)
h2
120 ±2 (4.72 ±0.07)
120 ±2 (4.72 ±0.07)
140 ±2 (5.51 ±0.07)
120 ±2 (4.72 ±0.07)
h3
45 ±2 (1.77 ±0.07)
45 ±2 (1.77 ±0.07)
50 ±2 (1.96 ±0.07)
45 ±2 (1.77 ±0.07)
n1
70 (2.75)
94 (3.70)
101 (3.97)
70 (2.75)
n2
176 (6.88)
176 (6.88)
200 (7.87)
176 (6.88)
n3
max. 140 (5.51)
max. 164
max. 187.5 (7.38)
max. 140 (5.51)
n4
54 ±2 (2.12 ±0.07)
54 ±2 (2.12 ±0.07)
68.5 ±2 (2.69
±0.07)
54 ±2 (2.12 ±0.07)
d3
M6
M6
M8
M6
PE
M6
M6
M6
M6
3.5-4.0
3.5-4.0
9.5-10.0
3.5-4.0
3.5-4.0
Tightening
torque [Nm]
Table 5- 8
Mounting dimensions of motor reactor, frame size FSF, all data in mm and (inches)
Motor reactor
6SE6400-
3TC14-5FD0
Frame size
Motor reactor
FSF
a2
20 (0.78)
FSF
20 (0.78)
a3
4 (0.15)
4 (0.15)
a4
10 (0.39)
10 (0.39)
a5
∅9 (0.35)
∅9 (0.35)
I4
357 (14.05)
270 (10.62)
I5
120 ±5 (4.72 ±0.19)
88 ±5 (3.46 ±0.19)
321 (12.63)
248 (9.76)
h2
185 ±2 (7.28 ±0.07)
140 ±2 (5.51 ±0.07)
h3
60 ±2 (2.36 ±0.07)
50 ±2 (1.96 ±0.07)
n1
138 (5.43)
101 (3.97)
n2
264 (10.39)
200 (7.87)
n3
max. 220.5 (8.68)
max. 187.5 (7.38)
hmax
Tightening
torque [Nm]
3TC15-4FD0
n4
65.5 ±2 (2.57 ±0.07)
68.5 ±2 (2.69 ±0.07)
d3
M8
M8
PE
M8
M6
9.5-10.0
9.5-10.0
3.5-4.0
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
145
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors (blocksize)
Mounting Power Modules and motor reactors
E
F
D
Figure 5-9
Mounting Power Modules and motor reactors, frame sizes FSB and FSC
Table 5- 9
Total dimensions, PM340 Power Module and motor reactor, frame sizes FSA, FSB, and FSC, all data in mm
and (inches)
Motor reactor
Frame size
Total dimension
of the Power
Module and
motor reactor
6SE6400-3TC004AD3
6SE6400-3TC004AD2
6SL3202-0AE210CA0
6SL3202-0AJ23-2CA0
FSA
FSA
FSB
FSC
D
200 (7.87)
200 (7.87)
270 (10.62)
334 (13.14)
E
75.5 (2.97)
75.5 (2.97)
153 (6.02)
189 (7.44)
F
259 (10.19)
259 (10.19)
235 (9.25)
245 (9.64)
Manual
146
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors (blocksize)
5.1.5
Electrical connection
3(FRQQHFWLRQ
0RWRUUHDFWRU
Figure 5-10
Electrical connection
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
147
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors (blocksize)
5.1.6
Table 5- 10
Technical data
Motor reactors for Power Modules 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC, frame size FSA
Motor reactor (for a 4 kHz pulse frequency)
Order number
6SE6400-3TC00-4AD2
Frame size
FSA
FSA
FSA
FSA
FSA
Suitable for Power Module
6SL32101SE11-3UA0
6SL32101SE11-7UA0
6SL32101SE12-2UA0
6SL32101SE13-1UA0
6SL32101SE14-1UA0
Rated current
A
Power loss
kW
4.5
0.005
Connection to the Power
Module
Cable 4 x 1.5 mm2
Length approx. 0.3 m
Motor connection
Screw terminals for cable cross-section 6 mm2
PE connection
M5 stud
Max. permissible cable
length between motor
reactor and motor
m
100 (shielded)
100 (shielded)
150 (unshielded)
225 (unshielded)
Degree of protection
IP20 or IPXXB
Weight, approx.
kg
Rated current Irated
of the Power Module
A
Table 5- 11
2
1.3
1.7
2.2
3.1
4.1
Motor reactors for Power Modules 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC, frame sizes FSB and FSC
Motor reactor (for a 4 kHz pulse frequency)
Order number
6SL3202-0AE21-0CA0
6SL3202-0AJ23-2CA0
Frame size
FSB
FSB
FSB
FSC
FSC
FSC
Suitable for Power
Module 6SL3210-
1SE16-0xxx
1SE17-7xxx
1SE21-0xxx
1SE21-8xxx
1SE22-5xxx
1SE23-2xxx
Rated current
A
Power loss
kW
10
25
0.02
0.06
Connection to the
Power Module
Cable 4 x 1.5 mm2
Length approx. 0.4 m
Cable 4 x 1.5 mm2
Length approx. 0.35 m
Motor connection
Screw-type terminals for cable cross-section
6 mm2
Screw-type terminals for cable crosssections 2.5 mm2 to 10 mm2
M5 stud
M5 stud
PE connection
Max. permissible
cable length
between motor
reactor and motor
m
100 (shielded)
150 (unshielded)
Degree of protection
Weight, approx.
IP20 or IPXXB
kg
Rated current Irated
A
of the Power Module
4.5
5.9
7.7
9
10
18
25
32
Manual
148
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors (blocksize)
Table 5- 12
Motor reactors for Power Modules 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC, frame sizes FSD and FSE
Motor reactor (for a 4 kHz pulse frequency)
Order no.
6SE6400-
3TC05-4DD0
3TC03-8DD0
3TC05-4DD0
3TC08-0ED0
3TC07-5ED0
Frame size
FSD
FSD
FSD
FSE
FSE
Suitable for Power
Module
6SL32106SL3215-
1SE23-8xxx
1SE23-8UAx
1SE24-5xxx
1SE26-0xxx
1SE26-0UAx
1SE27-5xxx
1SE27-5UAx
1SE31-0xxx
1SE31-0UAx
68
104
90
0.2
0.17
0.27
Rated current
A
68
45
Power loss
kW
0.2
0.2
Connection to the
Power Module
Flat connector for M6 cable lug
Motor connection
Flat connector for M6 cable lug
PE connection
Max. permissible
cable length between
motor reactor and
motor
M6 screw
m
200 (shielded)
300 (unshielded)
Degree of protection
IP00
Weight, approx.
kg
11.5
19
11.5
12
27
Rated current Irated
of the Power Module
A
38
45
60
75
90
Table 5- 13
Motor reactors for Power Modules 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC, frame size FSF
Motor reactor (for a 4 kHz pulse frequency)
Order no. 6SE6400-
3TC14-5FD0
3TC15-4FD0
3TC14-5FD0
Frame size
FSF
FSF
FSF
Suitable for Power Module
6SL32106SL3215-
1SE31-1xxx
1SE31-1UAx
1SE31-5xxx
1SE31-8xxx
1SE31-8UAx
Rated current
A
178
178
178
Power loss
kW
0.47
0.25
0.47
Connection to the Power
Module
Flat connector for M8 cable lug
Motor connection
Flat connector for M8 cable lug
PE connection
Max. permissible cable
length between motor
reactor and motor
M8 screw
m
200 (shielded)
300 (unshielded)
Degree of protection
IP00
Weight, approx.
kg
57
24
57
Rated current Irated
of the Power Module
A
110
145
178
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
149
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors (blocksize)
Manual
150
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
6
CU305 Control Units
6.1
Description
The Control Units
● CU305 PN (PROFINET)
● CU305 DP (PROFIBUS)
● CU305 CAN
are components in which the open-loop and closed-loop control functions for a drive are
implemented.
The table below shows an overview of the interfaces of the CU305 Control Units.
Table 6- 1
Number of interface for CU305 PN/CU305 DP/CU305 CAN
Type
CU305 PN
CU305 DP
CU305 CAN
Digital inputs/outputs 1)
4
4
4
Digital inputs, electrically isolated
5
5
5
Failsafe digital inputs
(F-DI) 2)
3
3
3
Analog input
1
1
1
Failsafe digital output (F-DO) 3)
1
1
1
DRIVE-CLiQ interface
1
1
1
PROFINET interface
2
--
--
PROFIBUS interface
--
1
--
CAN interface
--
--
1
Serial interface (RS232)
1
1
1
Power Module Interface (PM-IF)
1
1
1
Encoder interface (HTL/TTL/SSI)
1
1
1
Motor temperature sensor input
1
1
1
24 V electronics power supply
1
1
1
Test sockets
2
2
2
Interface for BOP
1
1
1
1) The bidirectional inputs are designed as "rapid inputs" and can be used for BEROs (3-core) or
measuring probes.
2) If the safety functions of the Control Unit are not being used, the failsafe digital inputs can be used
as 6 additional electrically isolated digital inputs.
3) If the safety functions of the Control Unit are not being used, the failsafe digital input can be used
as 1 additional electrically isolated digital input.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
151
CU305 Control Units
6.1 Description
Note
The rated values of the F-DO meet the requirements of EN 61131-2 for digital DC outputs
with 0.5 A rated current.
The operating ranges of the F-DIs meet the requirements of EN 61131-2 for type 1 digital
inputs.
Interface overview classified according to terminal
Terminal
CU305 PN
CU305 DP
CU305 CAN
Specific interfaces
X150 P1 / X150 P2
X126
PROFINET
-
-
-
PROFIBUS
CAN
Identical interfaces
X100
DRIVE-CLiQ
X124
Electronics power supply
X130
Failsafe digital inputs
X131
Failsafe digital inputs/outputs
X132
Digital inputs/outputs, analog input
X133
Digital inputs, motor temperature sensor input
X23
Encoder interface (HTL/TTL/SSI)
X22
Serial interface (RS232)
X520 / X521 / X522
Test sockets
Manual
152
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.2 Safety information
6.2
Safety information
WARNING
The cooling clearances of 50 mm above and below the components must be observed. It is
not permissible that the connecting cables cover the cooling openings.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
153
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
6.3
Interfaces
6.3.1
CU305 PN (PROFINET)
6.3.1.1
Overview CU305 PN
3RZHU0RGXOH,QWHUIDFH30,)
;33
352),1(7
;
'5,9(&/L4LQWHUIDFH
;
(QFRGHULQWHUIDFH
+7/77/66,
$
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ0
6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQ
ZLWK0VFUHZ
;
(OHFWURQLFVSRZHUVXSSO\
;
)DLOVDIHGLJLWDOLQSXWV
;
)DLOVDIHGLJLWDOLQSXWVRXWSXWV
;
'LJLWDOLQSXWVRXWSXWV
$QDORJLQSXW
;
'LJLWDOLQSXWV
WHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRULQSXW
;
6HULDOLQWHUIDFH
6WDUWHU,23
352),1(7/('V
/1.
$&7
/1.
$&7
7\SHSODWH
&RYHUIRU
%DVLF2SHUDWRU3DQHO
7HVWVRFNHWV
770
Figure 6-1
'LDJQRVWLF/('V
5'<
&20
287!9
02'
0HPRU\FDUG
VORW
Interface overview for CU305 PN
Manual
154
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
Note
The address switches, which are located beneath the cover for the Basic Operator Panel
BOP, have no function for the CU305 PN.
6.3.1.2
Table 6- 2
X150 P1 / P2 PROFINET
X150 P1 and X150 P2 PROFINET
Pin
Signal name
Technical specifications
1
RXP
Receive data +
2
RXN
Receive data -
3
TXP
Transmit data +
4
Reserved, do not use
-
5
Reserved, do not use
-
6
TXN
Transmit data -
7
Reserved, do not use
-
8
Reserved, do not use
-
Connector type:
RJ45 socket
Data rate:
100 Mbits or 10 Mbits
Note
The PROFINET interfaces support Auto MDI(X). It is therefore possible to use both crossed
and uncrossed cables to connect the devices.
There are four LEDs on the front panel of the CU305 PN to display status information about
the PROFINET interfaces (see section: "Interface overview", Figure: "CU305 PN interface
overview").
The table shows the status information these indicate.
Table 6- 3
LED states on the X150 P1/P2 PROFINET interface
LED
Color
Status
Description
LNKx
-
OFF
Missing or faulty link
Green
0.5 Hz flashing
light
Connection establishment
Continuous
10 or 100 Mbit link available
ACTx
-
OFF
No activity
Yellow
Flashing light
Sending or receiving data to/from port x
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
155
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
6.3.2
CU305 DP (PROFIBUS)
6.3.2.1
Overview CU305 DP
3RZHU0RGXOH,QWHUIDFH30,)
;
352),%86
;
'5,9(&/L4LQWHUIDFH
$
;
(QFRGHULQWHUIDFH
+7/77/66,
6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQ
ZLWK0VFUHZ
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ0
;
(OHFWURQLFVSRZHUVXSSO\
;
)DLOVDIHGLJLWDOLQSXWV
'LDJQRVWLF/('V
5'<
&20
287!9
02'
;
)DLOVDIHGLJLWDOLQSXWVRXWSXWV
;
'LJLWDOLQSXWVRXWSXWV
$QDORJLQSXW
;
'LJLWDOLQSXWV
WHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRULQSXW
&RQQHFWLRQIRU
%DVLF2SHUDWRU3DQHO
;
6HULDOLQWHUIDFH
6WDUWHU,23
352),%86
DGGUHVVVZLWFKHV
7HVWVRFNHWV
770
Figure 6-2
7\SHSODWH
0HPRU\FDUG
VORW
Description of the CU305 DP interfaces (ports)
Manual
156
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
6.3.2.2
Table 6- 4
X126 PROFIBUS/USS interface
X126 PROFIBUS/USS interface
Pin
Signal name
Technical specifications
1
Reserved, do not use
2
M
Ground to P24_SERV
3
1RS_DP
RS485 differential signal
4
1RTS_DP
Request To Send
5
1M
Ground to 1P5
6
1P5
5 V power supply for bus terminal, external, short
circuit-proof
7
P24_SERV
24 V for teleservice, short circuit-proof, 150 mA max.
8
1XRS_DP
RS485 differential signal
9
Reserved, do not use
Type: 9-pin SUB D socket
CAUTION
No CAN cables may be connected to the X126 interface. If CAN cables are connected, the
CU305 DP and other CAN bus nodes could be seriously damaged.
Communication with USS protocol via RS485
Interface X126 can also be used for communication with USS involving up to 32 nodes. The
software in the STARTER is used to change the PROFIBUS factory setting to USS. During
operation as a USS interface, only terminals 3, 5, and 8 are used.
Please refer to the SINAMICS S110 Function Manual for information on configuration.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
157
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
6.3.2.3
PROFIBUS/USS address switch
With the CU305 DP, the address switch can be used to set both PROFIBUS addresses and
USS addresses. Operation via USS is only possible if the factory setting in the STARTER of
PROFIBUS is changed to USS.
The factory setting for the address switch is 0 or 127. The address switch is located behind
the blanking plate. The blanking plate is part of the scope of supply.
Table 6- 5
PROFIBUS/USS address switch
Technical specifications
6LJQLILFDQFH
Switch
Significance
S1
20 = 1
S2
21 = 2
S3
22 = 4
21
S4
23 = 8
2))
S5
24 = 16
S6
25 = 32
S7
26 = 64
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
([DPSOH
352),%86866DGGUHVV
Setting the PROFIBUS address
1. Setting via parameter p0918
– The STARTER is used to set the bus address for a PROFIBUS node to a value
between 1 and 126. This is only possible if the address switch is set to 0 or 127
(factory setting).
2. Manual setting
– The address switch (DIP switch) is used to manually set the bus address to a value
between 1 and 126. In this case, p0918 is only used to read the address.
Setting the USS address
1. Setting via parameter p2021
– The STARTER is also used to set the bus address for USS nodes to a value between
0 and 30. This is only possible if the address switch is set to 0 or 127 (factory setting).
2. Manual setting
– The address switch (DIP switch) is used to manually set the address to a value
between 0 and 30. If addresses are set manually to values >30, the setting will revert
to the value set in parameter p2021 or the default value.
Note
A value of 0 is used as the address for USS if no other address has been saved in
parameter p2021.
Manual
158
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
6.3.3
CU305 CAN
6.3.3.1
Overview CU305 CAN
3RZHU0RGXOH,QWHUIDFH30,)
;
&$1
;
'5,9(&/L4LQWHUIDFH
$
;
(QFRGHULQWHUIDFH
+7/77/66,
6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQ
ZLWK0VFUHZ
;
(OHFWURQLFVSRZHUVXSSO\
;
)DLOVDIHGLJLWDOLQSXWV
6
',3VZLWFK
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ0
'LDJQRVWLF/('V
5'<
&20
287!9
02'
;
)DLOVDIHGLJLWDOLQSXWVRXWSXWV
;
'LJLWDOLQSXWVRXWSXWV
$QDORJLQSXW
;
'LJLWDOLQSXWV
WHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRULQSXW
&RQQHFWLRQ
%DVLF2SHUDWRU3DQHO
;
6HULDOLQWHUIDFH
6WDUWHU,23
$GGUHVVVZLWFK
QRIXQFWLRQ
7HVWVRFNHWV
770
Figure 6-3
7\SHSODWH
0HPRU\FDUG
VORW
Interface description CU305 CAN
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
159
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
6.3.3.2
Table 6- 6
X126 CAN interface
X126 CAN interface
Pin
Signal name
Technical specifications
1
Reserved, do not use
2
CAN_L
CAN signal
3
CAN_GND
CAN ground
4
Reserved, do not use
5
CAN_SHL
Optional shield
6
CAN_GND
CAN ground
7
CAN_H
CAN signal
8
Reserved, do not use
9
Reserved, do not use
Type: 9-pin SUB D socket
CAUTION
If the CAN interface is connected to the PROFIBUS connector, then this can destroy the
CAN interface.
6.3.3.3
Table 6- 7
S100 DIP switch
DIP switch
Switch
Function
Switch setting
2
Bus terminating resistor
120 Ohm
Off
Inactive
On
Active
Ungrounded, grounded
operation
Off
Ground-free operation
On
Operation with ground
1
Default
Off
Off
Manual
160
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
6.3.4
Common interfaces for CU305 PN/DP/CAN
6.3.4.1
X100 DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Table 6- 8
DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Pin
Signal name
Technical specifications
1
TXP
Transmit data +
2
TXN
Transmit data -
3
RXP
Receive data +
4
Reserved, do not use
5
Reserved, do not use
6
RXN
7
Reserved, do not use
Receive data -
8
Reserved, do not use
A
+ (24 V)
Power supply
B
GND (0 V)
Electronics ground
Connector type: RJ45 socket; blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interface included in the scope of delivery;
blanking plate (50 pieces) Order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0
The maximum DRIVE-CLiQ cable length is 100 m.
6.3.4.2
Table 6- 9
Electronics power supply X124
Terminal block X124
+
M
Terminal
Function
Technical specifications
+
Electronics power supply
Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 V - 28.8 V)
+
Electronics power supply
M
Electronic ground
Current consumption: max. 0.8 A (incl. 0.35A for HTL
encoders, without DRIVE-CLiQ and digital outputs)
M
Electronic ground
Max. current via jumper in connector: 20 A
Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm2
Type: Screw-type terminal (see Appendix A)
Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
161
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
Note
An additional external electronics power supply via terminal X124 is required in two cases:
 If the digital outputs DO 8 to DO 11 are in use, the power supply needs to be connected
to X124.
 The electronics power supply to the CU305 is supplied using the Power Module. If the
CU305 needs to remain functional when the Power Module is switched off, the power
supply needs to be connected to X124.
6.3.4.3
Table 6- 10
X130 failsafe digital inputs
Terminal block X130
Terminal
Designation
Technical specifications
1
DI 16
2
DI 17+
Input characteristics in accordance with IEC61131-2,
Type 1
3
DI 17-
4
DI 18
5
DI 19+
6
DI 19-
7
24 V1
Additional external power supply for connecting DI 16/DI
18 to ground M1.
See also "Example of circuits for the F-DI/F-DO..." in the
chapter titled "Example connections".
8
M1
Reference potential for the failsafe digital inputs/outputs
Typical current consumption: 6 mA at 24 V DC
Electrical isolation: The reference potential is terminal
M1
Permissible level (incl. ripple)
High level: 15 V to 30 V
Low level: -3 V to +5 V
An F-DI consists of one digital input and a second digital input where the cathode of the optocoupler is also fed out.
F-DI 0 = terminals 1, 2, and 3 (DI 16, DI 17+, and DI 17-)
F-DI 1 = terminals 4, 5, and 6 (DI 18, DI 19+, and DI 19-)
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm2
Type: Spring-loaded terminal 1 (see Appendix A)
1) DI: Digital input; F-DI: Failsafe digital input
NOTICE
An open input is interpreted as "low".
Note
If M1 is connected to M (X124 or X132), the system is no longer electrically isolated.
Manual
162
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
6.3.4.4
Table 6- 11
X131 failsafe digital inputs/outputs
Terminal block X131
Terminal
Designation 1)
Technical specifications
1
DI 20
2
DI 21+
Input characteristics in accordance with IEC61131-2,
Type 1
3
DI 21-
4
DI 22
Typical current consumption: 6 mA at 24 V DC
Electrical isolation: The reference potential is terminal
M1
Permissible level (incl. ripple)
High level: 15 V to 30 V
Low level: -3 V to +5 V
5
DO 16+
6
DO 16-
Maximum load current: 500 mA
Max. leakage current: 0.5 mA
Short-circuit protected
load types: resistive, capacitive, inductive
Switching frequency:
For inductive load: Max. 0.5 Hz
Maximum lamp load: 2 W
DO 16+: Current sourcing
DO 16-: Sink output
7
24 V1
Additional external power supply for DO 16+, terminal
X131/5.
See also "Example of circuits for the F-DI/F-DO..." in the
chapter titled "Example connections".
8
M1
Reference potential for the failsafe digital inputs/
outputs
An F-DI consists of one digital input and a second digital input where the cathode of the optocoupler is also fed out.
The F-DO consists of two digital outputs connected to an external 24 V power supply.
F-DI 2 = terminals 1, 2, and 3 (DI 20, DI 21+, and DI 21-)
F-DO 0 = terminals 5 and 6 (DO 16+ and DO 16-)
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm2
Type: Spring-loaded terminal 1 (see Appendix A)
1) DI: digital input, DO: Digital output; F-DI: Failsafe digital input; (F-DO) Failsafe digital output
Note
The failsafe digital output (DO 16+, DO 16-) switches off retentively in the event of a shortcircuit.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
163
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
6.3.4.5
Table 6- 12
X132 Digital inputs/outputs, analog input
Terminal block X132
Designation 1)
Technical specifications
1
DI/DO 8
2
DI/DO 9
3
DI/DO 10
4
DI/DO 11
As input:
input characteristics in accordance with IEC 61131-2,
Type 1
All digital inputs are floating. The reference potential is M.
Typical current consumption: 7 mA at 24 V DC
Terminal
Level (incl. ripple)
High level: 15 V to 30 V
Low level: -3 V to +5 V
DI 8, 9, 10, and 11 are "rapid inputs" 2)
Signal propagation times:
For "0" → "1": 4 μs
For "1" → "0": approx. 4 μs
As output:
Maximum load current: 100 mA
Max. leakage current: 0.5 mA
Short-circuit protected, automatic restart after short-circuit
Load types: Resistive, capacitive, inductive
Switching frequency:
For inductive load: Max. 0.5 Hz
Maximum lamp load: 2 W
5
M
6
M
7
AI +
8
AI -
Reference potential for the digital inputs/outputs and the
analog input
Differential input voltage: -10 to +10 V, maximum resolvable
range: -11 to +11 V
Common mode range: -15 V to +15 V
Resolution 13 bits
mm2
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5
Type: Spring-loaded terminal 1 (see Appendix A)
1) DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output, AI: analog input; M: Electronic ground
2) The rapid inputs can be used as probe inputs or as inputs for the external zero mark
CAUTION
The common mode range may not be violated. This means that the analog differential
voltage signals can have a maximum offset voltage of +/- 15 V with respect to the reference
potential. If the range is violated, incorrect results may occur during analog/digital
conversion.
NOTICE
An open input is interpreted as "low".
Manual
164
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
Note
A 24 V voltage supply must be connected to terminal X124 so that the digital outputs can be
used.
If the 24 V supply is briefly interrupted, then the digital outputs are de-activated during this
time.
6.3.4.6
Table 6- 13
X133 digital inputs, motor temperature sensor input
Terminal block X133
Terminal
Designation 1)
Technical specifications
1
DI 0
2
DI 1
Input characteristics in accordance with IEC61131-2,
Type 1
3
DI 2
4
DI 3
Typical current consumption: 6 mA at 24 V DC
Electrical isolation: The reference potential is terminal
M2.
Permissible level (incl. ripple)
High level: 15 V to 30 V
Low level: -3 V to +5 V
Reference potential M2
5
M2
6
M2
7
+ Temp
Motor temperature measurement KTY84-1C130 (KTY+)
Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130 / PTC
8
M (- Temp)
Ground for KTY or PTC
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm2
Type: Spring-loaded terminal 1 (see Appendix A)
1) DI: Digital input
NOTICE
An open input is interpreted as "low".
NOTICE
The KTY temperature sensor must be connected with the correct polarity.
Note
There are two ways of connecting the temperature sensor:
1. via X133, terminal 7 and 8
2. via X23, pin 1 and 8
However, only one temperature sensor may be connected as otherwise the parallel circuit
will be recorded and incorrect temperature values will be generated.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
165
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
DANGER
Risk of electric shock!
Only temperature sensors that meet the safety isolation specifications contained in
EN 61800-5-1 may be connected to terminals "+Temp" and "-Temp".
If these instructions are not complied with, there is a risk of electric shock!
6.3.4.7
Table 6- 14
X23 HTL/TTL/SSI encoder interface
Encoder connection X23
Pin
Signal name
Technical specifications
1
+ Temp
KTY or PTC input
2
SSI_CLK
SSI clock, positive
3
SSI_XCLK
SSI clock, negative
4
P_Encoder 5 V / 24 V
Encoder power supply
5
P_Encoder 5 V/24 V
Encoder power supply
6
P_Sense
Sense input encoder power supply
7
M
Ground for encoder power supply
8
M (- Temp)
Ground for KTY or PTC
9
M_Sense
Ground sense input
10
RP
R track positive
11
RN
R track negative
12
BN
B track negative
13
BP
B track positive
14
AN_SSI_XDAT
A track negative / SSI data negative
15
AP_SSI_DAT
A track positive / SSI data positive
Type: 15-pin sub D connector
NOTICE
The KTY temperature sensor must be connected with the correct polarity.
Note
There are two ways of connecting the temperature sensor:
1. via X133, terminal 7 and 8
2. via X23, pin 1 and 8
However, only one temperature sensor may be connected as otherwise the parallel circuit
will be recorded and incorrect temperature values will be generated.
Manual
166
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
Note
We recommend that bipolar encoders are used.
When using unipolar encoders the unused negative track signals can either be left
unconnected or connected to ground. This results in two different operating points.
Table 6- 15
Specification, measuring systems that can be connected
Parameter
Designation
Permissible signal level in bipolar
mode (parameter p0405.1=1);
(TTL, SSI, HTL bipolar at X23)1)2)
Udiff
Permissible signal frequency
fS
Required edge clearance
tmin
Threshold
Permissible zero pulse (with Ts = 1/fs) Length
Center of the
pulse position
Operating point in unipolar mode
(parameter p0405.0=0) and signals
AN_SSI_XDAT, BN, RN at X23
connected to M_Encoder
U(Switch)
Operating points in unipolar mode
(parameter p0405.0=0) and signals
AN_SSI_XDAT, BN, RN not
connected to X23
U(Switch)
Min.
Type
Max.
Unit
2.0
Vcc
V
-
500
kHz
100
-
ns
¼ · Ts
¾ · Ts
50
135
220
Degrees
High
(p0405.4=1)
8.4
10.6
13.1
V
Low
(p0405.4=0)
3.5
4.8
6.3
V
High
(p0405.4=1)
9
11.3
13.8
V
Low
(p0405.4=0)
5.9
7.9
10.2
V
1) Other signal levels according to the RS422 specification
2) The absolute level of the individual signals varies between 0 V and VCC of the measuring system.
NOTICE
Prefabricated cable for 5 V - TTL encoder
If a 5 V - TTL encoder (6FX encoder) is used, the connecting cable 6FX8002-2CR00-....
has to be used.
Table 6- 16
Maximum encoder cable length
Encoder type
Maximum encoder cable length in m
TTL1)
100
HTL unipolar2)
100
HTL bipolar
300
1) 100 m with remote sense
2) Because the physical transmission properties are more robust, the bipolar connection should
always be used. The unipolar connection should only be used if the encoder type does not output
push-pull signals.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
167
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
Connection example 1: HTL encoder, bipolar, with reference signal
;
.
.
.
.
.
.
8E
0
7UDFN$
7UDFN$
7UDFN%
7UDFN%
5HIHUHQFHVLJQDO5
5HIHUHQFHVLJQDO5
(QFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\9
(QFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\9
Figure 6-4
*URXQGIRUHQFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\
Connection example 1: HTL encoder, bipolar, with reference signal
Signal cables must be twisted in pairs in order to improve noise immunity against induced
noise.
Connection example 2: HTL encoder, unipolar, with reference signal
;
.
.
.
8E
0
7UDFN$
7UDFN%
7UDFN%
5HIHUHQFHVLJQDO5
Figure 6-5
7UDFN$
5HIHUHQFHVLJQDO5
(QFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\9
*URXQGIRUHQFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\
Connection example 2: HTL encoder, unipolar, with reference signal 1)
1) Because
the physical transmission media is more robust, the bipolar connection should
always be used. The unipolar connection should only be used if the encoder type does not
output push-pull signals.
Manual
168
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
6.3.4.8
Pulse/direction interface
Setpoint value specification with HTL level
Thanks to the pulse/direction interface, SINAMICS S110 can be used for simple positioning
tasks on a controller. Connection to the controller is via internal encoder interface X23 of the
CU305.
The controller gives the drive two signals: A pulse sequence with a pulse/pause ratio of
50:50 and a directional signal.
Table 6- 17
Setpoint value specification with HTL level
Pin
Signal name
Technical data
1 to 6
Not relevant
–
7
M
Ground
8 to 12
Not relevant
–
13
BP
Pulse/direction interface: Direction
B track positive
14
Not relevant
–
15
AP_DAT
Pulse/direction interface: Pulse
A track positive
Type: 15-pin SUB D connector
The required settings for the pulse/direction interface need to be made in the STARTER.
Please refer to the SINAMICS S110 Function Manual for details.
Connection example
The image below shows an example of how to connect a pulse/direction interface with HTL
level to interface X23 of a Control Unit CU305.
;
.
.
0
&RXQWVLJQDOSXOVHVHTXHQFH
PP
NP
Figure 6-6
'LUHFWLRQDOVLJQDO
*URXQG
Connection of a pulse/direction interface with HTL level to interface X23
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
169
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
Setpoint value specification: Sensor signal with TTL level
This sections shows an example of how to connect bipolar TTL encoders to the
pulse/direction interface of Control Unit CU305. Connection to the controller supports
setpoint value specification via A track and B track.
Table 6- 18
Setpoint value specification: Sensor signal with TTL level
Pin
Signal name
Technical data
1 to 6
Not relevant
–
7
M
Ground
8 to 11
Not relevant
–
12
Setpoint value specification, sensor
signal
B track positive
13
B track negative
Setpoint value specification, sensor
signal
14
15
A track negative
A track positive
Type: 15-pin SUB D connector
The required settings for the pulse/direction interface need to be made in the STARTER.
Please refer to the SINAMICS S110 Function Manual for details.
Connection example
The image below shows an example of how to connect TTL encoders to interface X23 of a
Control Unit CU305 for setpoint value specification via A track and B track.
;
Figure 6-7
.
.
(QFRGHUWUDFN$WUDFNSRVLWLYH
QHJDWLYH
.
.
(QFRGHUWUDFN%WUDFNSRVLWLYH
QHJDWLYH
0
*URXQG
Connection of TTL encoders to interface X23 for setpoint value specification via A track
and B track
Manual
170
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
6.3.4.9
Table 6- 19
X22 serial interface (RS232)
Serial interface (RS232)
Pin
Signal name
Technical data
1
Reserved, do not use
2
RxD
Receive data
3
TxD
Transmit data
4
Reserved, do not use
5
Ground
5
Reserved, do not use
6
Reserved, do not use
7
Reserved, do not use
8
Reserved, do not use
9
Reserved, do not use
Ground reference
Type: 9-pin SUB D connector
6.3.4.10
Table 6- 20
X520/521/522 measuring sockets
Measuring sockets X520, X521 and X522
Socket
Function
Technical specifications
T0
Measuring socket 0
Voltage: 0 V to 5 V
Resolution: 8 bits
Load current: max. 3 mA
Continued-short-circuit-proof
T1
Measuring socket 1
M
Ground for measuring sockets
The measuring sockets are only suitable for bunch pin plugs with a diameter of 2 mm.
Note
The test sockets are provided as a support to commissioning and diagnostics; they must not
be connected for normal operation.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
171
CU305 Control Units
6.3 Interfaces
6.3.4.11
Memory card slot
A memory card is needed in the following cases:
1. Saving parameters
Parameters are saved on the memory card and can simply be copied onto the new
CU305 if the component needs to be replaced.
2. Firmware update
It is easy to perform a firmware update using a memory card.
3. License carrier
The license is stored on the memory card.
Note
The CU305 can be operated without the memory card. The memory card only needs to
be inserted into the CU305 because it is the license carrier for the Safety functions.
Figure 6-8
Memory card slot
CAUTION
The memory card may only be inserted as shown in the figure (arrow top right).
The memory card should not be removed or inserted while data is being saved.
When returning a defective Control Unit, remove the memory card and keep it for insertion
in the replacement unit. This is important otherwise the data on the memory card
(parameters, firmware, licenses, and so on) may be lost.
Working with the memory card
For more detailed information on how to use the memory card, please refer to the
SINAMICS S110 Function Manual.
Manual
172
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.4 Connection examples
6.4
Connection examples
Connection examples without a safety function
$GGLWLRQDO
H[WHUQDO,2VXSSO\
9
0
;
9
9
0
&831
&8'3
&8&$1
0
0
0
;
;
',
',
',
',
',
',
9
0
;
s9
',
',
',
'2
QF
;
',
',
',
',
',
',
0
0
$,
7HPS
$,
7HPS
','2 287
9
0
0
5HTXLUHGWRVXSSO\GLJLWDORXWSXWV'2WR'2
8VHVKLHOGHGFDEOHVIRUIDVWLQSXWV
Figure 6-9
9
',
',
','2 '2
',
9
0
','2 ',
',
',
',
',
','2
',
',
8VHVKLHOGHGFDEOHIRUDQDORJLQSXW
8VHVKLHOGHGFDEOHIRUVHQVRULQSXWIRUPRWRUWHPSHUDWXUH
Internal connections of the CU305 without the safety function
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
173
CU305 Control Units
6.4 Connection examples
$GGLWLRQDO
([WHUQDO,2SRZHUVXSSO\
$GGLWLRQDO
([WHUQDO,2SRZHUVXSSO\
9
9
9
9
0
0
9
0
6
6
6
6
0
0
9
0
9
;
;
',
',
',
',
;
',
'2 6
6
0
+
9
0
0
6
6
6
9
6
+
+
+
6
',
',
+
;
','2
','2
','2
','2
',
',
',
',
;
6
6
6
6
0
7KHIXQFWLRQRIWHUPLQDOVDVLQSXWVRURXWSXWVFDQEHSDUDPHWHUL]HG
Figure 6-10
Example of circuits for the DI/DO without the safety function
Manual
174
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.4 Connection examples
Connection examples with a safety function
$GGLWLRQDO
([WHUQDO,2VXSSO\
9
0
;
9
9
0
&831
&8'3
&8&$1
0
0
0
;
',b
',
',
',
',
;
)',
)'2
9
0
','2
',b
',
',
',b
'2
'2
9
0
','2 ','2 )',
','2 )',
',b
s9
;
287
9
;
',b
',b
',b
',b
',b
',b
',b
',b
0
0
0
0
$,
7HPS
$,
7HPS
5HTXLUHGIRUVXSSO\RIWKHGLJLWDORXWSXWV'2WR'2
8VHVKLHOGHGFDEOHVIRUIDVWLQSXWV
8VHVKLHOGHGFDEOHIRUDQDORJLQSXW
8VHVKLHOGHGFDEOHIRUPRWRUWHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRULQSXW
7KHLQYHUVLRQFDQEHSDUDPHWHUL]HG
Figure 6-11
Internal connections of the CU305 with the safety function
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
175
CU305 Control Units
6.4 Connection examples
$GGLWLRQDO
([WHUQDO,2SRZHUVXSSO\
$GGLWLRQDO
([WHUQDO,2SRZHUVXSSO\
9
9
9
9
0
0
24 V1
1)
&XUUHQWVRXUFLQJ
6LQNRXWSXW
+
M
M1
24 V1
24 V1
&XUUHQWVRXUFLQJ
2)
M1
24 V1
M1
&XUUHQWVRXUFLQJ
;
;
M1
24 V1
)',
)',
;
)',
',
)'2
24 V1
M1
M1
+
S8
S9
S10
24 V2
S11
1)
H8
H9
H10
H11
;
','2
','2
','2
','2
',
',
',
',
;
S0
S1
S2
S3
M2
&RQQHFWLRQH[DPSOHIRUDVDIHW\UHODWHGFRQWUROOHUZLWK3DQG0VZLWFKLQJRXWSXWV
&RQQHFWLRQH[DPSOHIRUDVDIHW\UHODWHGFRQWUROOHUZLWKWZR3VZLWFKLQJRXWSXWV
Figure 6-12
Example of circuits for the F-DI/F-DO with the safety function
Further information about connections can be found in the manual:
SINAMICS S110 Function Manual Drive Functions
Manual
176
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.5 Meaning of LEDs
6.5
Meaning of LEDs
There are four LEDs on the front panel of the CU305 housing.
RDY
Ready
COM
Option Board
OUT>5V
Encoder current supply > 5 V (TTL/HTL)
MOD
Operating mode (reserved)
The various LEDs are switched on and off as the control unit is powered up (depending on
the phase the system is currently running through). When switched on, the color of the LEDs
shows the status of the corresponding power-up phase (see section: "LED display during
power up").
In the event of a fault, power up will be ended in the corresponding phase. The LEDs
switched on retain their current colors so that the fault can be determined on the basis of the
combination of the colored lights that are lit and unlit.
Once the CU305 has booted correctly, all the LEDs are switched off briefly.
The system is ready to operate when the "RDY" LED lights up green permanently.
All the LEDs are controlled by the software loaded during operation (see section: "LED
display" during operation).
Note
Fault code with BOP inserted
If the fault code F01018 appears on the display when the BOP is inserted, this means that
power up of the CU305 has been aborted due to a software fault or incorrect
parameterization. The device is reset in this case and automatically restarted using the
factory settings.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
177
CU305 Control Units
6.5 Meaning of LEDs
6.5.1
Behavior of the LEDs during booting
Loading
Table 6- 21
Load software
LED
Status
RDY
COM
OUT>5V
MOD
Orange
Orange
OFF
Red
Reset
Red
Red
OFF
OFF
BIOS loaded
Red 2 Hz
Red
OFF
OFF
BIOS error
Red 2 Hz
Red 2 Hz
OFF
OFF
File error
Comment
Hardware reset
Error occurred while loading the
BIOS
Memory card not inserted or
faulty
Software on memory card not
present or corrupted
Table 6- 22
Firmware
LED
Status
Comment
RDY
COM
OUT>5V
MOD
Red
Orange
OFF
OFF
Firmware loading
COM-LED flashing without
specific flashing frequency
Red
OFF
OFF
OFF
Firmware loaded
-
OFF
Red
OFF
OFF
Firmware check
(no CRC error)
-
Red 0.5 Hz
Red 0.5 Hz
OFF
OFF
Firmware check
(CRC error)
CRC is incorrect
Orange
OFF
OFF
OFF
Firmware
initialization
-
Manual
178
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.5 Meaning of LEDs
Update
Table 6- 23
Firmware update from memory card
LED
Status
Comment
RDY
COM
OUT>5V
MOD
Red
Orange
OFF
OFF
Firmware update
COM-LED flashing without
specific flashing frequency
Red 2 Hz
Red
OFF
OFF
Firmware update
failed
Check whether the memory
card is inserted or replace the
memory card.
Red 0.5 Hz
Red 0.5 Hz
OFF
OFF
Red 2 Hz
Red
OFF
OFF
Red 2 Hz
Red 2 Hz
OFF
OFF
6.5.2
Table 6- 24
Firmware update
complete, waiting for
POWER ON
Firmware check
(CRC error)
CRC is incorrect.
Firmware or memory Check the firmware version or
card incompatible
memory card.
Behavior of the LEDs in the operating state
Control Unit CU305 – description of the LEDs in the operating state
LED
Color
Status
Description/cause
Remedy
RDY
(READY)
-
OFF
Electronic power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
Check the power
supply
Green
Continuous
The unit is ready for operation.
Cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is in
progress.
-
0.5 Hz flashing
light
Commissioning/reset
-
2 Hz flashing
light
Writing to the memory card.
-
Red
Flashing
2 Hz
General errors
Check parameter
assignment/configurati
on.
Red/green
Flashing
0.5 Hz
The control unit is ready for operation, but there
are no software licenses.
Install the missing
licenses.
Flashing
0.5 Hz
Updating the firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ
components.
-
Flashing
2 Hz
DRIVE-CLiQ component firmware update
completed. Waiting for POWER ON of the
corresponding components.
Switch on the
component.
Detection of the component via LED is activated
(p0124[0]).
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when
module recognition is activated via p0124[0] = 1.
-
Orange
Green/
Flashing
orange
2 Hz
or
Red/orange
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
179
CU305 Control Units
6.5 Meaning of LEDs
LED
Color
Status
Description/cause
Remedy
COM
CU305 DP
CU305 PN
-
OFF
Cyclic communication is not (yet) running.
Note:
The PROFIdrive is ready for communication
when the Control Unit is ready for operation
(see LED: RDY).
-
Green
Continuous
Cyclic communication is taking place.
-
Flashing
0.5 Hz
Full cyclic communication is not yet taking
place. 1)
-
Flashing
0.5 Hz
The PROFIBUS master is sending a faulty
parameter assignment or the configuration is
incorrect.
Modify the
configuration between
master/controller and
control unit.
Flashing
2 Hz
Cyclic bus communication has been interrupted
or could not be established
Rectify the fault in bus
communication.
-
OFF
Electronics power supply is missing or outside
permissible tolerance range.
Communication Board defective or not inserted.
-
Green
Continuous
OPERATIONAL
-
Flashing
2.5 Hz
PREOPERATIONAL
No PDO communication possible.
-
Single flash
STOPPED
Only NMT communication possible.
-
Continuous
BUS OFF
Check the baud rate
and cabling.
Single flash
ERROR PASSIVE MODE
Check the baud rate
The error counter for "error passive" has reached and cabling.
the value 127.
Double flash
Error Control Event
a Guard Event has occurred.
Check the connection
to CANopen master.
Red
COM
CU305 CAN
Red
MOD
-
OFF
Operating state (reserved)
-
OUT > 5 V
-
OFF
-
-
Orange
Continuous
The voltage of the electronics power supply for
the measuring system is 24 V. 1)
-
1) Make sure that the encoder connected is designed for a 24 V supply. Connecting a 5 V encoder to a 24 V supply can
result in destruction of the encoder electronics.
Manual
180
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.6 Dimension drawings
6.6
Dimension drawings
6.6.1
Dimension drawing, CU305 PN
Figure 6-13
Dimension drawing of Control UnitCU305 PN, all data in mm and (inches)
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
181
CU305 Control Units
6.6 Dimension drawings
6.6.2
Dimension drawing CU305 DP/CAN
Figure 6-14
Dimension drawing of Control Unit CU305 DP and CU305 CAN, all data in mm and (inches)
Manual
182
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
CU305 Control Units
6.7 Mounting
6.7
Mounting
Snap-mounting the CU305 onto the Power Module PM340
(frame size FSA)
Power Module PM340 (frame size FSA) with CU305
The procedure when mounting the Control Unit on the Power Module is independent of the
frame size of the Power Modules.
Removing the Control Unit
Removing the CU305 from the Power Module PM340 (frame size FSA)
In order to remove the Control Unit from the Power Module, the blue release lever, as shown
in the diagram, must be pressed downwards and the Control Unit swung out to the front.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
183
CU305 Control Units
6.8 Technical data
6.8
Table 6- 25
Technical data
Technical data for CU305 PN/DP/CAN
Unit
Value
VDC
ADC
24 (20.4 – 28.8)
0.8
Electronics power supply
Voltage
Current consumption (without DRIVE-CLiQ
and digital outputs)
Power loss
W
<20
Measuring system power supply
Voltage
VDC
Current
ADC
TTL: 5 V (with or without Remote Sense)
HTL: VDC - 1 V
0.35
PE/ground connection
On housing with M4/3 Nm screw
Response time
The response time of digital inputs/outputs depends on the evaluation (refer
to the function diagram).
Further information can be found in the manual:
SINAMICS S, List Manual, Chapter "Function diagrams".
Weight
kg
0.95
Manual
184
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder
system integration
7.1
Basic Operator Panel BOP20
7.1.1
Description
7
The Basic Operator Panel BOP20 contains six keys and a backlit display unit. The BOP20
can be plugged onto a SINAMICS Control Unit and operated.
The following functions are possible with the BOP:
● Input of parameters and activation of functions
● Display of operating modes, parameters, alarms and faults
7.1.2
Interface description
Figure 7-1
Basic Operator Panel BOP20
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
185
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.1 Basic Operator Panel BOP20
Overview of displays and keys
Figure 7-2
Table 7- 1
Overview of displays and keys
Displays
Display
Meaning
top left
2 positions
The active drive object of the BOP is displayed here.
The displays and key operations always refer to this drive object.
RUN
Is lit (bright) if the displayed drive is in the RUN state (in operation).
top right
2 positions
The following is displayed in this field:

More than 6 digits: Characters that are present but cannot be seen (e.g. "r2" ––> 2 characters
to the right are invisible, "L1" ––> 1 character to the left is invisible)

Faults: Selects/displays other drives with faults

Designation of BICO inputs (bi, ci)
 Designation of BICO outputs (bo, co)
Source object of a BICO interconnection to a drive object different than the active one.
S
Is lit (bright) if at least one parameter was changed and the value was not transferred into the nonvolatile memory.
P
Is lit (bright) if, for a parameter, the value only becomes effective after pressing the P key.
C
Is lit (bright) if at least one parameter was changed and the calculation for consistent data
management has still not been initiated.
Below, 6 position
Displays, e.g. parameters, indices, faults and alarms.
Manual
186
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.1 Basic Operator Panel BOP20
BOP20 keyboard
Table 7- 2
Key
Assignment of the BOP20 keyboard
Name
Meaning
ON
Powering-up the drives for which the command "ON/OFF1",
"OFF2" or "OFF3" should come from the BOP.
OFF
Powering-down the drives for which the commands "ON/OFF1",
"OFF2" or "OFF3" should come from the BOP.
Note:
The effectiveness of these keys can be defined using the
appropriate BICO parameterization (e.g. using these keys, it is
possible to simultaneously control all of the axes that have been
configured).
The structure of the BOP control word corresponds to the structure
of the PROFIBUS control word.
Functions
The meaning of these keys depends on the actual display.
Note:
The effectiveness of this key to acknowledge faults can be defined
using the appropriate BiCo parameterization.
Parameter
The meaning of these keys depends on the actual display.
Raise
The keys are dependent on the actual display and are used to
raise or lower values.
Lower
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
187
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.1 Basic Operator Panel BOP20
7.1.3
Installation
NOTICE
Make sure that you insert and withdraw the BOP20 straight into/out of the CU305 and that it
is not tilted up or down.
This prevents damage to the interface for the BOP20 at the CU305.
Mounting
The photographs show how to mount the Basic Operator Panel BOP20 on a CU305.
1. BOP20 and Control Unit CU305
2. Press the latching cams of the cover together
simultaneously.
3. To remove the blanking cover, press the latching cams of 4. Press the latching cams on the BOP20 together
the cover together simultaneously and pull the cover straight simultaneously and push the BOP20 straight into the
out.
housing of the CU305 until you hear it latch into position.
Note
The BOP20 may be inserted or withdrawn while the Control Unit is operational.
Manual
188
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.1 Basic Operator Panel BOP20
Dismantling
1. Press the latching cams of the BOP20 together simultaneously.
2. Keep the latching cams pressed together and pull the BOP20 straigth out.
3. Insert the blanking cover.
Display and operator controls of the BOP20
For information about display and operator controls of the BOP20, refer the SINAMICS S120
Commissioning Manual.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
189
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10
7.2
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10
7.2.1
Description
The Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10 evaluates encoder signals and transmits the
speed, actual position value, rotor position and, if necessary, the motor temperature via
DRIVE-CLiQ to the Control Unit.
The SMC10 is used to evaluate sensor signals from resolvers.
7.2.2
Safety information
WARNING
The ventilation spaces of 50 mm above and below the component must be observed.
NOTICE
Only one encoder system may be connected per Sensor Module.
Note
There must be no electrical connection between the encoder system housing and the signal
cables, or the encoder system electronics. If this is not carefully observed, under certain
circumstances the system will not be able to reach the required interference immunity level
(there is then a danger of equalization currents flowing through the electronics ground).
CAUTION
Connecting cables to temperature sensors must always be installed with shielding. The
cable shield must be connected to the ground potential at both ends over a large surface
area. Temperature sensor cables that are routed together with the motor cable must be
twisted in pairs and shielded separately.
Manual
190
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10
7.2.3
Interface description
7.2.3.1
Overview
;
'5,9(&/L4LQWHUIDFH
;
(OHFWURQLFSRZHUVXSSO\
/('
;
(QFRGHUV\VWHPLQWHUIDFH
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
01P
Figure 7-3
Interface description of the SMC10
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
191
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10
7.2.3.2
Table 7- 3
DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500
DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500
Pin
Signal name
Technical specifications
1
TXP
Transmit data +
2
TXN
Transmit data -
3
RXP
Receive data +
4
Reserved, do not use
5
Reserved, do not use
6
RXN
7
Reserved, do not use
8
Reserved, do not use
A
Reserved, do not use
B
GND (0 V)
Receive data -
Electronic ground
Connector type: RJ45 socket; blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interface included in the scope of delivery;
blanking plate (50 pieces) Order no.: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0
7.2.3.3
Table 7- 4
X520 encoder system interface
X520 encoder system interface
Pin
Signal name
Technical specifications
1
Reserved, do not use
2
Reserved, do not use
3
S2
Resolver signal A (sin+)
4
S4
Inverted resolver signal A (sin-)
5
Ground
Ground (for internal shield)
6
S1
Resolver signal B (cos+)
7
S3
Inverted resolver signal B (cos-)
8
Ground
Ground (for internal shield)
9
R1
Resolver excitation positive
10
Reserved, do not use
11
R2
12
Reserved, do not use
13
+ Temp
14
Reserved, do not use
15
Reserved, do not use
16
Reserved, do not use
17
Reserved, do not use
18
Reserved, do not use
19
Reserved, do not use
20
Reserved, do not use
Resolver excitation negative
Motor temperature measurement KTY84-1C130 (KTY+)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130 / PTC
Manual
192
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10
Pin
Signal name
21
Reserved, do not use
Technical specifications
22
Reserved, do not use
23
Reserved, do not use
24
Ground
Ground (for internal shield)
25
- Temp
Motor temperature measurement KTY84-1C130 (KTY-)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130 / PTC
Connector type: SUB-D, 25-pole
NOTICE
The KTY temperature sensor must be connected with the correct polarity.
DANGER
Risk of electric shock!
Only temperature sensors that meet the safety isolation specifications contained in
EN 61800-5-1 may be connected to terminals "+Temp" and "-Temp".
If these instructions are not complied with, there is a risk of electric shock!
7.2.3.4
Table 7- 5
X524 Electronics power supply
X524 terminal block
+
M
Terminal
Function
Technical specifications
+
Electronic power supply
Voltage: 24 V (20.4 V – 28.8 V)
+
Electronic power supply
Current consumption: Max. 0.35 A
M
Electronic ground
Maximum current via jumper in connector: 20 A
M
Electronic ground
Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm²
Type: Screw-type terminal (see Appendix A)
Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
193
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10
Cause and rectification of faults
Further information about the causes of faults and how to remedy them may be found in the
manual: SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual.
7.2.4
Meaning of the LED
Table 7- 6
Meaning of LEDs on the Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10
LED
RDY
READY
Color
Status
Description, cause
Remedy
-
Off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible
tolerance range.
–
Green
Continuous
light
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVECLiQ communication is taking place.
–
Orange
Continuous
light
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
Continuous
light
At least one fault is present in this component.
Remedy and
acknowledge fault
Flashing
0.5 Hz
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
Flashing
2 Hz
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON
Carry out a POWER
ON
Flashing
light
Component recognition via LED is activated (p0144).
–
Green/
red
Green/
orange
or
Red/
orange
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when component
recognition is activated via p0144 = 1.
Cause and rectification of faults
The following documents contain information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)
SINAMICS S120/S150, List Manual (LH1)
Manual
194
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10
7.2.5
Dimension drawing
Figure 7-4
7.2.6
Dimension drawing of the Sensor Module Cabinet SMC10, all dimensions in mm and (inches)
Mounting
Installation
1. Tilt the component backwards slightly and attach it to the DIN rail using the hook.
2. Push the component towards the DIN rail until you hear the mounting slide at the rear
latch into position.
3. You can now move the component to the left or right along the DIN rail, until it reaches its
final position.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
195
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10
Removal
1. The lug on the mounting slide first needs to be pushed down to unlock the slide from the
DIN rail.
2. The component can now be tilted forwards and pulled up and off the DIN rail.
7LOWWKHPRGXOHIRUZDUG
0RXQWLQJVOLGH
3XVKOXJGRZQ
Figure 7-5
Removal of a component from a DIN rail
Manual
196
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10
7.2.7
Technical data
Table 7- 7
Technical data
6SL3055-0AA00-5AAx
Unit
Value
Electronics power supply
Voltage
Current (without encoder system)
Current (with encoder system)
Power loss
VDC
ADC
ADC
W
24 DC (20.4 – 28.8)
≤ 0.20
≤ 0.35
≤ 10
Vrms
Vrms
0.5
4.1
1
Excitation voltage (cannot be parameterized)
Vrms
4.1
Excitation frequency (synchronized to the current
controller clock cycle)
kHz
5 to 16
Specification
Transformation ratio of the resolver (ü)
Excitation voltage on the SMC10 when ü=0.5
Amplitude monitoring threshold (secondary tracks)
of the SMC10
PE/ground connection
On housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Max. encoder cable length
m
130
Weight
kg
0.45
Degree of protection
Table 7- 8
IP20 or IPXXB
Max. frequency that can be evaluated (speed)
Resolver
Max. speed resolver / motor
Number of poles
Number of pole pairs
8kHz/125 μsec
4kHz/250 μsec
2kHz/500 μsec
2-pole
1
120,000 rpm
60,000 rpm
30,000 rpm
4-pole
2
60,000 rpm
30,000 rpm
15,000 rpm
6-pole
3
40,000 rpm
20,000 rpm
10,000 rpm
8-pole
4
30,000 rpm
15,000 rpm
7,500 rpm
The ratio between the ohmic resistance R and the inductance L (the primary winding of the
resolver) determines whether the resolver can be evaluated with the SMC10. See the
following diagram:
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
197
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10
0LQLPDOLPSHGDQFHV
,QGXFWDQFH/>P+@
3URKLELWHGUDQJH
Figure 7-6
2KPLFUHVLVWDQFH5>2KP@
Connectable impedances with an excitation frequency f = 5000 Hz
Manual
198
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20
7.3
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20
7.3.1
Description
The Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20 evaluates encoder signals and transmits the
speed, actual position value, rotor position and, if necessary, the motor temperature and
reference point via DRIVE-CLiQ to the Control Unit.
The SMC20 is used to evaluate encoder signals from incremental encoders with SIN/COS
(1 Vpp) or absolute encoders with EnDat 2.1 or SSI.
7.3.2
Safety information
WARNING
The ventilation spaces of 50 mm above and below the component must be observed.
NOTICE
Only one encoder system may be connected per Sensor Module.
Note
There must be no electrical connection between the encoder system housing and the signal
cables, or the encoder system electronics. If this is not carefully observed, under certain
circumstances the system will not be able to reach the required interference immunity level
(there is then a danger of equalization currents flowing through the electronics ground).
CAUTION
Connecting cables to temperature sensors must always be installed with shielding. The
cable shield must be connected to the ground potential at both ends over a large surface
area. Temperature sensor cables that are routed together with the motor cable must be
twisted in pairs and shielded separately.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
199
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20
7.3.3
Interface description
7.3.3.1
Overview
;
'5,9(&/L4LQWHUIDFH
;
(OHFWURQLFSRZHUVXSSO\
/('
;
(QFRGHUV\VWHPLQWHUIDFH
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
01P
Figure 7-7
Interface description of the SMC20
Manual
200
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20
7.3.3.2
Table 7- 9
DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500
DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500
Pin
Signal name
Technical specifications
1
TXP
Transmit data +
2
TXN
Transmit data -
3
RXP
Receive data +
4
Reserved, do not use
5
Reserved, do not use
6
RXN
7
Reserved, do not use
8
Reserved, do not use
A
Reserved, do not use
B
GND (0 V)
Receive data -
Electronic ground
Connector type: RJ45 socket; blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interface included in the scope of delivery;
blanking plate (50 pieces) Order no.: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0
7.3.3.3
Table 7- 10
X520 encoder system interface
X520 encoder system interface
Pin
Signal name
Technical specifications
1
P encoder
Encoder power supply
2
M encoder
Ground for encoder power supply
3
A
Incremental signal A
4
A*
Inverse incremental signal A
5
Ground
Ground (for internal shield)
6
B
Incremental signal B
7
B*
Inverse incremental signal B
8
Ground
Ground (for internal shield)
9
Reserved, do not use
10
Clock
Clock, EnDat interface, SSI clock
11
Reserved, do not use
12
Clock*
Inverted clock, EnDat interface,
inverted SSI clock
13
+ Temp
Motor temperature measurement KTY84-1C130 (KTY+)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130 / PTC
14
P sense
Sense input encoder power supply
15
Data
Data, EnDat interface,
SSI data
16
M sense
Ground sense input encoder power supply
17
R
Reference signal R
18
R*
Inverse reference signal R
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
201
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20
Pin
Signal name
Technical specifications
19
C
Absolute track signal C
20
C*
Inverse absolute track signal C
21
D
Absolute track signal D
22
D*
Inverse absolute track signal D
23
Data*
Inverse data, EnDat interface,
Inverse SSI data
24
Ground
Ground (for internal shield)
25
- Temp
Motor temperature measurement KTY84-1C130 (KTY-)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130 / PTC
NOTICE
The KTY temperature sensor must be connected with the correct polarity.
DANGER
Risk of electric shock!
Only temperature sensors that meet the safety isolation specifications contained in
EN 61800-5-1 may be connected to terminals "+Temp" and "-Temp".
If these instructions are not complied with, there is a risk of electric shock!
7.3.3.4
Table 7- 11
Electronics power supply X524
X524 terminal block
+
M
Terminal
Function
Technical specifications
+
Electronic power supply
Voltage: 24 V (20.4 V – 28.8 V)
+
Electronic power supply
Current consumption: Max. 0.35 A
M
Electronic ground
Maximum current via jumper in connector: 20 A
M
Electronic ground
Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm²
Type: Screw-type terminal (see Appendix A)
Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
Manual
202
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20
Cause and rectification of faults
Further information about the causes of faults and how to remedy them may be found in the
manual: SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual.
7.3.4
Meaning of the LED
Table 7- 12
Meaning of LEDs on the Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20
LED
RDY
READY
Color
Status
Description, cause
Remedy
-
Off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible
tolerance range.
–
Green
Continuous
light
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVECLiQ communication is taking place.
–
Orange
Continuous
light
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
Continuous
light
At least one fault is present in this component.
Remedy and
acknowledge fault
Flashing
0.5 Hz
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
Flashing
2 Hz
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON
Carry out a POWER
ON
Flashing
light
Component recognition via LED is activated (p0144).
–
Green /
red
Green /
orange
or
Red /
orange
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when component
recognition is activated via p0144 = 1.
Cause and rectification of faults
The following documents contain information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)
SINAMICS S120/S150, List Manual (LH1)
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
203
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20
7.3.5
Dimension drawing
Figure 7-8
7.3.6
Dimension drawing of the Sensor Module Cabinet SMC20, all data in mm and (inches)
Mounting
Installation
1. Tilt the component backwards slightly and attach it to the DIN rail using the hook.
2. Push the component towards the DIN rail until you hear the mounting slide at the rear
latch into position.
3. You can now move the component to the left or right along the DIN rail, until it reaches its
final position.
Manual
204
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20
Removal
1. The lug on the mounting slide first needs to be pushed down to unlock the slide from the
DIN rail.
2. The component can now be tilted forwards and pulled up and off the DIN rail.
7LOWWKHPRGXOHIRUZDUG
0RXQWLQJVOLGH
3XVKOXJGRZQ
Figure 7-9
Removal of a component from a DIN rail
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
205
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20
7.3.7
Table 7- 13
Technical data
Technical data
6SL3055-0AA00-5BAx
Unit
Value
Electronics power supply
Voltage
Current (without encoder system)
Current (with encoder system)
Power loss
VDC
ADC
ADC
W
24 DC (20.4 – 28.8)
≤ 0.20
≤ 0.35
≤ 10
Encoder system power supply
Voltage
Current
Vencoder
Aencoder
5 V DC (with Remote Sense) 1)
0.35
Encoder frequency that can be evaluated
(fencoder)
kHz
≤ 500
SSI baud rate 2)
kHz
100 (6SL3055-0AA00-5BA2)
100 - 250 (6SL3055-0AA00-5BA3)
Max. encoder cable length
m
100
PE/ground connection
Weight
On housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
kg
Degree of protection
0.45
IP20 or IPXXB
1) A controller compares the encoder system supply voltage - sensed via the Remote Sense cables - with the reference
supply voltage of the encoder system, and adjusts the supply voltage for the encoder system at the output of the drive
module until the required supply voltage is obtained directly at the encoder system (only for 5 V encoder system power
supply).
2) Only possible for SSI encoders with 5 V supply
NOTICE
Current controller clock cycle
When a current controller clock cycle of 31.25 µs is used, a SMC20 with MLFB 6SL30550AA00-5BA3 must be used.
Manual
206
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
7.4
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
7.4.1
Description
The Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30 evaluates encoder signals and transmits the
speed, actual position value and, if necessary, the motor temperature and reference point via
DRIVE-CLiQ to the Control Unit.
The SMC30 is used to evaluate encoder signals from encoders with TTL, HTL, or SSI
interfaces.
A combination of TTL/HTL signal and SSI absolute signal is possible at terminals
X521/X531, if both signals are derived from the same measured variable.
7.4.2
Safety information
WARNING
The ventilation spaces of 50 mm above and below the component must be observed.
NOTICE
Only one encoder system may be connected per Sensor Module.
Note
There must be no electrical connection between the encoder system housing and the signal
cables, or the encoder system electronics. If this is not carefully observed, under certain
circumstances the system will not be able to reach the required interference immunity level
(there is then a danger of equalization currents flowing through the electronics ground).
CAUTION
When the encoder system is connected via terminals, make sure that the cable shield is
connected to the component.
CAUTION
Connecting cables to temperature sensors must always be installed with shielding. The
cable shield must be connected to the ground potential at both ends over a large surface
area. Temperature sensor cables that are routed together with the motor cable must be
twisted in pairs and shielded separately.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
207
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
7.4.3
Interface description
7.4.3.1
Overview
;
'5,9(&/L4LQWHUIDFH
;
(OHFWURQLFVSRZHU
VXSSO\
/('V
;
HQFRGHUV\VWHPLQWHUIDFH
+7/77/ZLWK
WUDFNPRQLWRULQJ
66,
$OWHUQDWLYHHQFRGHUV\VWHP
;
LQWHUIDFH
+7/77/ZLWK
WUDFNPRQLWRULQJ
;
66,
6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQ
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
01P
Figure 7-10
Interface description of the SMC30
Manual
208
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
7.4.3.2
Table 7- 14
DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500
DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500
Pin
Signal name
Technical specifications
1
TXP
Transmit data +
2
TXN
Transmit data -
3
RXP
Receive data +
4
Reserved, do not use
5
Reserved, do not use
6
RXN
7
Reserved, do not use
8
Reserved, do not use
A
Reserved, do not use
B
GND (0 V)
Receive data -
Electronic ground
Connector type: RJ45 socket; blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interface included in the scope of delivery;
blanking plate (50 pieces) Order no.: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0
7.4.3.3
Table 7- 15
X520 encoder system interface
X520 encoder system interface
Pin
Signal name
Technical specifications
1
Reserved, do not use
+ Temp
2
Clock
SSI clock
3
Clock*
Inverse SSI clock
4
P encoder 5 V / 24 V
Encoder power supply
5
P encoder 5 V / 24 V
6
P sense
Sense input encoder power supply
7
M encoder (M)
Ground for encoder power supply
8
Reserved, do not use
- Temp
9
M sense
Ground sense input
10
R
Reference signal R
11
R*
Inverse reference signal R
12
B*
Inverse incremental signal B
13
B
Incremental signal B
14
A* / data*
Inverse incremental signal A/inverse SSI data
15
A / data
Incremental signal A/SSI data
Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY+)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130/PTC/bimetallic
switch with NC contact
Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY-)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130/PTC/bimetallic
switch with NC contact
Connector type: SUB-D female, 15-pin
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
209
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
CAUTION
The encoder supply can be parameterized to 5 V or 24 V. The sensor may be destroyed if
you enter the wrong parameters.
NOTICE
The KTY temperature sensor must be connected with the correct polarity.
For details of how to parameterize the KTY temperature sensors, refer to the SINAMICS
S120 Function Manual (FH1) in the Chapter "Monitoring and protective functions/Thermal
motor monitoring".
DANGER
Risk of electric shock!
Only temperature sensors that meet the safety isolation specifications contained in
EN 61800-5-1 may be connected to terminals "+Temp" and "-Temp".
If these instructions are not complied with, there is a risk of electric shock!
Manual
210
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
7.4.3.4
Table 7- 16
X521 / X531 alternative encoder system interface
X521 / X531 alternative encoder system interface
Pin
X521
X531
Designation
Technical specifications
1
A
Incremental signal A
2
A*
Inverse incremental signal A
3
B
Incremental signal B
4
B*
Inverse incremental signal B
5
R
Reference signal R
6
R*
Inverse reference signal R
7
CTRL
Control signal
8
M
Ground
1
P_Encoder 5 V / 24 V
Encoder power supply
2
M_Encoder
Ground for encoder power supply
3
- Temp
Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY-)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130/PTC/bimetallic
switch with NC contact
4
+ Temp
Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY+)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130/PTC/bimetallic
switch with NC contact
5
Clock
SSI clock
6
Clock*
Inverse SSI clock
7
Data
SSI data
8
Data*
Inverse SSI data
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm2
When using unipolar HTL encoders, at the terminal block A*, B*, R* must be connected to (jumper) M_Encoder (X531)1).
1) Because the physical transmission media is more robust, the bipolar connection should always be used. The unipolar
connection should only be used if the encoder type does not output push-pull signals.
CAUTION
When the encoder system is connected via terminals, make sure that the cable shield is
connected to the component. Refer to the Chapter "Electrical connection".
NOTICE
The KTY temperature sensor must be connected with the correct polarity.
For details of how to parameterize the KTY temperature sensors, refer to the SINAMICS
S120 Function Manual (FH1) in the Chapter "Monitoring and protective functions/Thermal
motor monitoring".
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
211
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
DANGER
Risk of electric shock!
Only temperature sensors that meet the safety isolation specifications contained in
EN 61800-5-1 may be connected to terminals "+Temp" and "-Temp".
If these instructions are not complied with, there is a risk of electric shock!
7.4.3.5
Table 7- 17
X524 Electronics power supply
X524 terminal block
+
M
Terminal
Function
Technical specifications
+
Electronic power supply
Voltage: 24 V (20.4 V – 28.8 V)
+
Electronic power supply
Current consumption: Max. 0.35 A
M
Electronic ground
Maximum current via jumper in connector: 20 A
M
Electronic ground
Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm²
Type: Screw-type terminal (see Appendix A)
Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
Manual
212
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
7.4.4
Connection examples
Connection example 1: HTL encoder, bipolar, with reference signal
;
.
.
.
.
.
.
8E
0
7UDFN$
7UDFN$
7UDFN%
7UDFN%
5HIHUHQFHVLJQDO5
5HIHUHQFHVLJQDO5
&75/
*URXQG
;
Figure 7-11
(QFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\9
*URXQGIRUHQFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\
Connection example 1: HTL encoder, bipolar, with reference signal
Signal cables must be twisted in pairs in order to improve noise immunity against induced
noise.
Connection example 2: HTL encoder, unipolar, with reference signal
;
.
7UDFN$
.
.
8E
0
7UDFN$
7UDFN%
7UDFN%
5HIHUHQFHVLJQDO5
5HIHUHQFHVLJQDO5
&75/
*URXQG
;
Figure 7-12
(QFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\9
*URXQGHQFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\
Connection example 2: HTL encoder, unipolar, with reference signal1)
1) Because
the physical transmission media is more robust, the bipolar connection should
always be used. The unipolar connection should only be used if the encoder type does not
output push-pull signals.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
213
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
Figure 7-13
Photo of connection example 2: SMC30, 30 mm wide
Note: Diagram of the wire jumpers to connect unipolar HTL encoders with reference signal
Manual
214
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
7.4.5
Meaning of LEDs
Cause and rectification of faults
The following documents contain information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)
SINAMICS S120/S150, List Manual (LH1)
Table 7- 18
Meaning of LEDs on the Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30
LED
RDY
READY
Color
Status
Remedy
-
Off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
tolerance range.
Green
Continuous
light
The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVECLiQ communication is taking place.
–
Orange
Continuous
light
DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
–
Red
Continuous
light
At least one fault is present in this component.
Remedy and
acknowledge fault
Green/
red
Flashing
0.5 Hz
Firmware is being downloaded.
–
Green/
red
Flashing
2 Hz
Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON.
Carry out a POWER
ON
Green/
orange
Flashing
light
Component recognition via LED is activated (p0144).
–
or
Red/
orange
OUT > 5 V
Description, cause
Note:
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when component
recognition is activated via p0144 = 1.
-
Off
Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible –
tolerance range.
Power supply ≤ 5 V.
Orange
Continuous
light
Electronics power supply for encoder system available.
Power supply > 5 V.
–
Important:
Make sure that the connected encoder can be operated
with a 24 V power supply. If an encoder that is designed
for a 5 V supply is operated with a 24 V supply, this can
destroy the encoder electronics.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
215
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
7.4.6
Dimension drawing
Figure 7-14
7.4.7
Dimension drawing of the Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, all data in mm and (inches)
Mounting
Installation
1. Tilt the component backwards slightly and attach it to the DIN rail using the hook.
2. Push the component towards the DIN rail until you hear the mounting slide at the rear
latch into position.
3. You can now move the component to the left or right along the DIN rail, until it reaches its
final position.
Manual
216
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
Removal
1. The lug on the mounting slide first needs to be pushed down to unlock the slide from the
DIN rail.
2. The component can now be tilted forwards and pulled up and off the DIN rail.
7LOWWKHPRGXOHIRUZDUG
0RXQWLQJVOLGH
3XVKOXJGRZQ
Figure 7-15
Removal of a component from a DIN rail
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
217
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
7.4.8
Protective conductor connection and shield support
Shield contacts are only required if the system is connected to X521/X531.
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
01P
Figure 7-16
:HLGP¾OOHU
7\SH./%ž&2
2UGHUQR
Shield contacts for the SMC30
Weidmüller website address: http://www.weidmueller.com
The bending radii of the cables must be taken into account (see MOTION-CONNECT
description).
NOTICE
Only use screws with a permissible mounting depth of 4 - 6 mm.
Manual
218
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
7.4.9
Table 7- 19
Technical Specifications
Technical data
6SL3055-0AA00-5CAx
Unit
Value
Electronics power supply
Voltage
Current (without encoder system)
Current (with encoder system)
Power loss
VDC
ADC
ADC
W
24 DC (20.4 – 28.8)
≤ 0.20
≤ 0.55
≤ 10
Encoder system power supply
Voltage
Current
Vencoder
Aencoder
5 VDC (with or without Remote Sense) 1) or VDC - 1 V
0.35
Encoder frequency that can be evaluated
(fencoder)
kHz
≤ 300
SSI baud rate
kHz
100 - 250
PE/ground connection
On housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight
0.45
Degree of protection
IP20 or IPXXB
1) A controller compares the encoder system supply voltage - sensed via the Remote Sense cables - with the reference
supply voltage of the encoder system, and adjusts the supply voltage for the encoder system at the output of the drive
module until the required supply voltage is obtained directly at the encoder system (only for 5 V encoder system power
supply). Remote Sense only to X520.
Table 7- 20
Specification of encoder systems that can be connected
Parameter
Designation
Min.
Max.
Unit
High signal level
(TTL bipolar at X520 or X521/X531)1)
UHdiff
Threshold
2
5
V
Low signal level
(TTL bipolar at X520 or X521/X531)1)
ULdiff
-5
-2
V
Signal level high
(HTL unipolar)
UH3)
High
17
VCC
V
Low
10
VCC
V
Signal level low
(HTL unipolar)
UL3)
High
0
7
V
Low
0
2
V
High signal level
(HTL bipolar)2)
UHdiff
3
VCC
V
Low signal level
(HTL bipolar)2)
ULdiff
-VCC
-3
V
High signal level
(SSI bipolar at X520 or X521/X531)1)
UHdiff
2
5
V
Low signal level
(SSI bipolar at X520 or X521/X531)1)
ULdiff
-5
-2
V
Signal frequency
fS
-
300
kHz
Edge clearance
tmin
100
-
ns
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
219
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
Parameter
Designation
Min.
Max.
Unit
"Zero pulse inactive time"
(before and after A=B=high)
tLo
Threshold
640
(tALo-BHi - tHi)/2 4)
ns
"Zero pulse active time"
(while A=B=high and beyond) 5)
tHi
640
tALo-BHi - 2*tLo 4)
ns
1) Other signal levels according to the RS 422 standard.
2) The absolute level of the individual signals varies between 0 V and VCC of the encoder system.
3) Only with order number 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA2 and firmware version 2.5 SP1 or higher can this value be configured
using software. For older firmware releases and Order Nos. less than 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA2 then the "low" threshold
applies.
4) tALo-BHi is not a specified value, but is the time between the falling edge of track A and the next but one rising edge of
track B.
5) Further information on setting the "Zero pulse active time" can be found in the manual: SINAMICS S120, Function
Manual, tolerant encoder monitoring for SMC30
Table 7- 21
Encoders that can be connected
X520
(SUB-D)
X521
(terminal)
X531
(terminal)
Track
monitoring
Remote Sense2)
HTL bipolar 24 V
No/yes
Yes
No/yes
No
HTL unipolar 24 V 1)
No/yes
Yes (however, a bipolar
connection is recommended) 1)
No
No
TTL bipolar 24 V
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
TTL bipolar 5 V
Yes
Yes
Yes
To X520
SSI 24 V/5 V
Yes
Yes
No
No
TTL unipolar
No
1) Because the physical transmission media is more robust, the bipolar connection should always be used. The unipolar
connection should only be used if the encoder type does not output push-pull signals.
2) A controller compares the encoder system supply voltage - sensed via the Remote Sense cables - with the reference
supply voltage of the encoder system, and adjusts the supply voltage for the encoder system at the output of the drive
module until the required supply voltage is obtained directly at the encoder system (only for 5 V encoder system power
supply).
Table 7- 22
Maximum encoder cable length
Encoder type
TTL1)
HTL
unipolar2)
Maximum encoder cable length in m
100
100
HTL bipolar
300
SSI
100
1) For TTL encoders at X520 → Remote Sense → 100 m
2) Because the physical transmission properties are more robust, the bipolar connection should
always be used. The unipolar connection should only be used if the encoder type does not output
push-pull signals.
Manual
220
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
For encoders with a 5 V supply at X521/X531, the cable lengths depend on the encoder
current (for 0.5 mm2 cable cross-sections):
&DEOHOHQJWK>P@
(QFRGHUSRZHU
Figure 7-17
Max. cable length as a function of the encoder current drawn
For encoders without Remote Sense the permissible cable length is restricted to 100 m
(reason: the voltage drop depends on the cable length and the encoder current).
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
221
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30
$$
%%
W 0LQ
W 0LQ
IV
Figure 7-18
Signal characteristic of track A and track B between two edges: Time between two edges
with pulse encoders
$ದ$ %ದ% 5ದ5 W /R
Figure 7-19
7ROHUDQFHUDQJH
IRUULVLQJ
HGJHRIWKH
]HURSXOVH
7ROHUDQFHUDQJH
IRUIDOOLQJ
HGJHRIWKH
W $/R%+L ]HURSXOVH
W +,
W /R
Position of the zero pulse to the track signals
Manual
222
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, braking signal
7.5
Option modules, braking signal
7.5.1
Introduction
A brake control option module (Safe Brake Relay) is required for operating motors with
holding brakes.
The brake control option module is the electrical interface between the CU/PM340 and the
brake of a motor.
This is mounted in the Screening Kit (refer to the Chapter "Screening Kit") or alternatively at
the rear cabinet panel.
7.5.2
Safe Brake Relay
The Safe Brake Relay can be used in conjunction with Power Modules in blocksize format to
control a 24 V DC motor brake.
The brake is electronically controlled. All holding brakes can be used up to 2 A. To operate
the brake, it is necessary to connect the supply voltage for the brake separately at the brake
control option module. In this case, a regulated power supply is required whose rated value
(to balance the voltage drop in the supply cable for the 24 V DC motor brake coil) can be set
to 26V (e.g. SITOP modular).
Table 7- 23
Overview of the Safe Brake Relay interfaces
Type
Number
Connection for the solenoid of the motor brake
1
Connection for a 24 V DC power supply
1
Connection for the pre-fabricated (CTRL) to the
Power Module, Blocksize format
1
The Safe Brake Relay is shipped with the pre-fabricated cable to connect to the Power
Module and all of the customer connectors.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
223
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, braking signal
7.5.2.1
Safety Information
Note
A regulated DC power supply is required to operate motors with a built-in holding brake. The
power supply is supplied via the internal 24 V busbars. The voltage tolerances of the motor
holding brakes and the voltage drops of the connection cables must be taken into account.
The DC power supply should be set to 26 V. This ensures that the power supply for the
brake remains within the permissible range when the following conditions are fulfilled:
 Using Siemens three-phase motors
 Using Siemens MOTION-CONNECT power cables
 Motor cable lengths: max. 100 m
7.5.2.2
Interface description
Overview
&RQQHFWLRQIRUWKH
PRWRUEUDNHVROHQRLG
Figure 7-20
&RQQHFWLRQ
IRU9'&VXSSO\
&RQQHFWLRQIRUWKHSUHIDEULFDWHG
FDEOH&75/WRWKH3RZHU0RGXOH
%ORFNVL]HIRUPDW
Interface description: Safe Brake Relay
Manual
224
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, braking signal
Electronics power supply X524
Table 7- 24
Terminal block X524
+
M
Terminal
Function
Technical specifications
+
Electronics power supply
Voltage: 24 V (20.4 V – 28.8 V)
+
Electronics power supply
M
Electronic ground
Current consumption: max. 0.3 A (without motor
holding brake)
M
Electronic ground
Maximum current via jumper in connector: 20 A
Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm²
Type: Screw-type terminal (see Appendix A)
Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
Brake connection
Table 7- 25
Connector
Designation
Technical specifications
Brake connection
Relay output (close)
PE connection
M4 / 3 Nm
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
225
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, braking signal
7.5.2.3
Connection example
3RZHU
0RGXOH
3RZHU0RGXOH,QWHUIDFH30,)
,QWHUIDFHWR&RQWURO8QLW
w3
3UHIDEULFDWHGFDEOH
8 9 : 3(
6DIH%UDNH5HOD\
&2,/
H[W
9 0
0
0
%5
%5
0
a
&75/
Figure 7-21
Safe Brake Relay connection example
Manual
226
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, braking signal
7.5.2.4
Figure 7-22
Dimension drawing
Dimension drawing of Safe Brake Relay, all data in mm and (inches)
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
227
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, braking signal
7.5.2.5
Mounting
The Safe Brake Relay can be mounted below the Power Module on the Screening Kit.
5HWDLQLQJVFUHZV
6DIH%UDNH5HOD\
Figure 7-23
Mounting the Safe Brake Relay on the Screening Kit (frame size FSA)
Manual
228
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, braking signal
6DIH%UDNH5HOD\
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
6DIH%UDNH5HOD\
0RXQWLQJVFUHZ
Figure 7-24
Mounting the Safe Brake Relay on the Screening Kit (frame sizes FSB and FSC)
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
229
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, braking signal
7.5.2.6
Technical data
Safe Brake Relay
Power supply
20.4 to 28.8 V DC
Recommended nominal value of the power supply 26 V DC
(to equalize and compensate for the voltage drop along the
feeder cable to the 24 V DC solenoid of the motor brake)
Max. permissible current drain of
the motor brake
2A
Max. current requirements (at 24 V
DC)
0.05 A + the current drain of the motor brake
Max. connectable cross section
2.5 mm2
Weight, approx.
0.17 kg
Manual
230
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Accessories
8.1
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland
8.1.1
Description
8
The DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing is used to connect two DRIVE-CLiQ cables and can be
installed in a control cabinet wall.
At the interface outside the control cabinet, a DRIVE-CLiQ connection is established with
degree of protection IP67 according to EN 60529; however, inside the control cabinet, a
connection is created with degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB according to EN 60529. The
interface between the control cabinet wall and the DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing requires
degree of protection IP54 according to EN 60529.
In addition to the data lines, the power supply contacts of DRIVE-CLiQ are also routed via
the coupling.
8.1.2
Safety Information
Note
Only cables from Siemens may be used for DRIVE-CLiQ connections.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
231
Accessories
8.1 DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland
8.1.3
Interface description
8.1.3.1
Overview
Figure 8-1
1
8.1.4
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing
Covering cap, Yamaichi, order number: Y-ConAS-24-S
2
IP67 interface according to EN 60529
3
Mounting holes
4
IP20 or IPXXB interface according to EN 60529
Dimension drawing
Figure 8-2
Dimension drawing of the DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing, all dimensions in mm and (inches)
Manual
232
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Accessories
8.1 DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland
8.1.5
Installation
In order to install the DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing, a cut-out must be made in the control
cabinet panel according to the diagram shown below.
š
5
Figure 8-3
Cut-out for the cabinet
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
233
Accessories
8.1 DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland
Installation
1. Insert the components from the outer side of the cabinet through the opening in the
cabinet.
2. Secure the DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing to the outer control cabinet wall using two M3
screws and two nuts. In order to ensure good electromagnetic compatibility, a good
electrical connection must be established between the DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing and
the cabinet wall over a large surface area.
0
1P
&RQWUROFDELQHWZDOO
'5,9(&/L4
FDELQHWEXVKLQJ
Figure 8-4
8.1.6
Installing the DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing
Technical data
Table 8- 1
Technical data
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing
6SL3066-2DA00-0AA0
Unit
Weight
kg
Degree of protection
0.165
IP20 or IPXXB acc. to EN 60529 in the electrical cabinet
IP54 to EN 60529 outside the electrical cabinet
Manual
234
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Accessories
8.2 DRIVE-CLiQ coupling
8.2
DRIVE-CLiQ coupling
8.2.1
Description
The DRIVE-CLiQ coupling is used to connect two DRIVE-CLiQ cables in accordance with
degree of protection IP67 acc. to EN 60529.
In addition to the data lines, the power supply contacts of DRIVE-CLiQ are also routed via
the coupling.
You can find information on the permissible cable length in the chapter "DRIVE-CLiQ signal
cables".
8.2.2
Safety information
Note
Only cables from Siemens may be used for DRIVE-CLiQ connections.
8.2.3
Interface description
8.2.3.1
Overview
Figure 8-5
DRIVE-CLiQ coupling
1
Rating plate
2
Covering caps, Yamaichi, order number: Y-ConAS-24-S
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
235
Accessories
8.2 DRIVE-CLiQ coupling
Dimension drawing
Figure 8-6
8.2.4
Dimension drawing of the DRIVE-CLiQ coupling, all dimensions in mm and (inches)
Manual
236
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Accessories
8.2 DRIVE-CLiQ coupling
8.2.5
Installation
&RQWDFWVXUIDFHV
šRU01P
s
s
s
s
Figure 8-7
šRU01P
Hole drilling pattern for installation
1. Fit the DRIVE-CLiQ coupling to the mounting surface in accordance with the drilling
pattern.
2. Remove the protective caps from the DRIVE-CLiQ coupling.
3. Insert the DRIVE-CLiQ plugs at both ends of the DRIVE-CLiQ coupling until they latch
into place.
8.2.6
Technical data
Table 8- 2
Technical data
DRIVE-CLiQ coupling 6SL3066- Unit
2DA00-0AB0
Weight
kg
Degree of protection
IP67 acc. to EN 60529
0.272
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
237
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit
8.3
Screening Kit
8.3.1
Description
A Screening Kit is offered as an optional shield support for Power Modules in frame sizes
FSA to FSF. It provides shield support for the power cables. The Screening Kit is screwed
directly onto the wall of the control cabinet for frame sizes FSA to FSC. With frame sizes
FSD to FSF, it is attached to the Power Module. For frame sizes FSB and FSC, the
Screening Kit accessories pack contains a ferrite core for damping radio cable disturbances.
Figure 8-8
Table 8- 3
Power Module PM340 (frame sizes FSD, FSE) with CUA31 and Screening Kit
Overview of Screening Kits
PM340 frame size
FSA
FSB
FSC
FSD
FSE
FSF
Screening Kit
6SL3262-
1AA00-0BA0
1AB00-0DA0
(with ferrite
core)
1AC00-0DA0
(with ferrite
core)
1AD00-0DA0
1AD00-0DA0
1AF00-0DA0
Manual
238
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit
8.3.2
Dimension drawings
8.3.2.1
Screening Kits
Dimension drawings of Screening Kits, frame sizes FSA to FSC
[ෘ
ෘ
Dimension drawing of Screening Kit, frame size FSA, all data in mm and (inches)
[ෘ
ෘ
Figure 8-10
ෘ
ෘ
ෘ
ෘ
Figure 8-9
[ෘ
ෘ
Dimension drawing of Screening Kit, frame size FSB, all data in mm and (inches)
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
239
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit
[ෘ
ෘ
Figure 8-11
ෘ
ෘ
[ෘ
ෘ
Dimension drawing of Screening Kit, frame size FSC, all data in mm and (inches)
Manual
240
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit
8.3.2.2
Blocksize Power Modules with Screening Kits
Dimension drawings of Power Modules with Screening Kit, frame sizes FSA to FSF
Figure 8-12
Dimension drawing of PM340 Power Module with Screening Kit, frame size FSA, all
dimensions in mm and (inches)
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
241
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit
Dimension drawing of PM340 Power Module with Screening Kit, frame size FSB, all
dimensions in mm and (inches)
Figure 8-13
Figure 8-14
Dimension drawing of PM340 Power Module with Screening Kit, frame size FSC, all
dimensions in mm and (inches)
Manual
242
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit
Figure 8-15
Dimension drawing of PM340 Power Module with Screening Kit, frame size FSD, all
dimensions in mm and (inches)
Figure 8-16
Dimension drawing: PM340 Power Module with Screening Kit, frame size FSE, all
dimensions in mm and (inches)
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
243
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit
Figure 8-17
Dimension drawing: PM340 Power Module with Screening Kit, frame size FSF, all
dimensions in mm and (inches)
Manual
244
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit
8.3.3
Mounting
8.3.3.1
Overview
Frame size FSA
Figure 8-18
Mounting a Screening Kit on a Power Module of frame size FSA
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
245
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit
Frame size FSB/FSC
)HUULWHFRUH
Figure 8-19
Mounting a Screening Kit and ferrite core on a Power Module of frame sizes FSB and
FSC
Manual
246
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit
Mounting the ferrite core
The ferrite core supplied should be attached to the line cable in order to dampen radio cable
disturbances. The open ferrite core shown in the figure below is placed around the cable and
snapped together in order to close it. The neck of the core (see the U-shaped collar in the
figure below) enables the core to clamp onto the cable automatically, thus fixing it in position.
&ROOODU
8VKDSHG
Figure 8-20
Ferrite core, open
If the core does not sit securely in position on the cable (due to the cable having a small
diameter), a cable tie can be lashed tightly around the cable next to the closed ferrite core in
order to prevent the ferrite from moving along the cable.
Frame sizes FSD/FSE
$
Figure 8-21
%
Mounting a Screening Kit on a Power Module of frame sizes FSD and FSE
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
247
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit
Frame size FSF
$
Figure 8-22
%
Mounting a Screening Kit on a Power Module of frame size FSF
Manual
248
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit
8.3.3.2
Blocksize Liquid Cooled Power Modules
Frame sizes FSD and FSE
Figure 8-23
Mounting a Screening Kit on a Liquid Cooled Power Module PM340, frame sizes FSD and FSE
Frame size FSF
Figure 8-24
Mounting a Screening Kit on a Liquid Cooled Power Module PM340, frame size FSF
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
249
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit
Manual
250
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize
format
9.1
9
General
The SINAMICS S components are designed in accordance with degree of protection IP20 or
IPXXB acc. to EN 60529 and as open-type devices to UL 50. This ensures protection against
electric shock.
To ensure protection against mechanical stress and climatic conditions too, the components
should only be operated in housing, cabinets or enclosed electrical operating areas that fulfill
at least degree of protection IP54 and, as enclosure type 12, are designed to UL 50.
Prefabricated MOTION-CONNECT cables are recommended.
Note
Functional safety of SINAMICS components
The components must be protected against conductive pollution (e.g. by installing them in a
cabinet with degree of protection IP54B acc. to EN 60529. Provided that conductive pollution
can be prevented at the installation site, the degree of protection for the cabinet can be
decreased accordingly.
Installation in a cabinet with degree of protection IP54B according to EN 60529 is advisable
to ensure the safety functions of Safety Integrated are not compromised.
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
Part 1: Type-tested and partially type-tested low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
assemblies
If the SINAMICS S drive line-up is used for the electrical equipment of machines, the
applicable requirements of EN 60204-1 must also be adhered to.
Safety of machinery
Electrical equipment of machines
Part 1: General requirements
All information for device selection in this section applies to
● Operation in a TN system
● Operating voltage range from 200 V 1-ph. AC to 440 V 3-ph. AC
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
251
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.2 Safety information
9.2
Safety information
DANGER
To protect against electric shock the components should only be operated in closed
electrical operating areas or in cabinets. Furthermore, an internal protective conductor
connection of the components is absolutely essential.
The components generate high leakage currents in the protective conductor. In order to
ensure protection against electric shocks if the external protective conductor is interrupted,
one of the following measures must be implemented for the external connection:
 stationary connection and protective conductor connection by means of ≥ 10 mm2 Cu or
≥ 16 mm2 Al
 stationary connection and automatic shutdown of the power supply if the protective
conductor is interrupted
DANGER
If the shielding procedures described and the specified cable lengths are not observed, the
machine may not operate properly.
CAUTION
To ensure that the encoder system works properly, you are advised to use the original
Siemens accessories from catalog PM 21.
Only motors with a safe electrically isolated holding brake may be connected. The brake
conductors must also be safely electrically isolated.
If the motor power cable is connected to intermediate terminals, the power cables and
brake cables must be routed apart (≥ 300 mm).
After an intermediate terminal (caused by a terminal block, for example), it is best to
continue routing using the approved MOTION-CONNECT cables.
CAUTION
The conductor pair for the motor holding brake must be themselves shielded (braided
shield). For MOTION-CONNECT cables, this is provided by the inner shield.
WARNING
Cable shields and unused conductors of power cables (e.g. brake conductors) must be
connected to PE potential.
Non-observance can cause lethal shock voltages.
Manual
252
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.2 Safety information
Note
When installing the equipment in cabinets, the ventilation slots must be covered to prevent
drill swarf, wire end ferrules, and the like from falling into the housing.
Safety regulations governing shock protection must be observed. See also EN 60204–1.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
253
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.3 Notes on electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
9.3
Notes on electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Requirements to implement EMC are listed in EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61800-3,
EN 60204-1 and in the EMC Design Directives - Order No. 6FC5297-0AD30-0*P2
(*A: German, *B: English). Conformance with the EMC Directive of the EC can be secured
by following the measures described in the EMC Design Directives.
When mounting components in cabinets, in order to fulfill the EMC directive, the following
conditions must be additionally observed:
● Connected to TN line supply systems with grounded neutral point
● SINAMICS line filter (optional for frame size FSA)
● Observance of information about cable shielding and equipotential bonding
● Only the recommended Siemens power and signal cables are used
● Only cables from Siemens may be used for DRIVE-CLiQ connections.
For MOTION-CONNECT cables, refer to catalog PM21
CAUTION
If couplings or cabinet glands are needed for the DRIVE-CLiQ connections, only the
DRIVE-CLiQ coupling and DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland, described in the Chapter
Accessories, may be used.
DANGER
If the shielding procedures described and the specified cable lengths are not observed, the
machine may not operate properly.
Manual
254
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.4 Cable Shielding and Routing
9.4
Cable Shielding and Routing
In order to comply with the EMC requirements, certain cables must be routed apart from
other cables and from certain components. To full EMC requirements, the following cables
must be used with shields:
● Power supply cables from line filter via line reactor to Power Module
● All motor cables (if necessary, including cables for motor holding brake)
● Cables for "fast inputs" of the Control Unit
● Cables for analog direct voltage/current signals
● Signal cables for sensors
● Cables for temperature sensors
DANGER
A suitable PE conductor must be connected to all devices in protection class I.
The PE conductor connection of the individual components must have at least 4 mm².
Alternative measures (e.g. routing behind mounting plates, suitable clearances) can also be
used provided they have similar results. This excludes measures that relate to the design,
installation, and routing of motor power cables and signal cables. If unshielded cables are
used between the line supply connection point and the line filter, make sure that no
interfering cables are routed in parallel.
The cable shields must be connected as close to the conductor terminal connections as
possible to ensure a low-impedance connection with cabinet ground.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
255
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.4 Cable Shielding and Routing
Figure 9-1
Shielding of a Power Module PM340
1. Line supply input
2. Motor cable
3. Rear metal panel
4. Use suitable clamps/clips to reliably connect the shield of the motor and field cable to the
rear metal panel.
5. Shielded cable
Alternatively, the cable shields can be connected to them metal mounting plate using pipe
clamps and serrated rails. The cable length between the shield contact point and the
terminals for cable conductors must be kept as short as possible.
Shield connection plates with pre-prepared clip contacts are available for connecting the
shields for power cables of Power Modules.
All cables inside the cabinet must be connected as closely as possible to parts connected
with cabinet ground, such as a mounting plate or cabinet wall. Ducts made of sheet steel or
routing cables between steel sheets (e.g. between the mounting plate and back wall) should
provide adequate shielding.
Avoid, where possible, routing non-shielded cables, connected to the drive line-up, in the
immediate vicinity of noise sources, e.g. transformers. Signal cables (shielded and
unshielded) connected to the drive line-up must be laid at a great distance from strong
external magnetic sources (e.g. transformers, line reactors). In both cases, a distance of ≥
300 mm is usually sufficient.
Manual
256
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.5 24 V DC Supply Voltage
9.5
24 V DC Supply Voltage
9.5.1
General
The 24 V DC voltage is required for the power supply of:
1. The load voltage of the Control Unit digital outputs.
The Control Units are supplied with power via the PM-IF. 24 V must also be connected in
the following cases:
– Commissioning / diagnostics when the Power Module power supply is switched-out.
– Using the digital outputs CU305
2. The electronics of the Sensor Module
3. The Safe Brake Relay (motor holding brake)
Other loads can be connected to these power supply units if they are separately protected
from overcurrent.
Note
The user should provide the electronics power supply as described in Chapter "System data"
in this documentation.
When connecting to a "DC power supply" in the sense of EN 60204-1:1997, Chapter 4.3.3,
functional faults can occur due to the voltage interruptions that are permitted there.
NOTICE
If other consumers are connected to the power supply, connected inductance devices
(contactors, relays) must be fitted with suitable overvoltage protection circuits.
NOTICE
A regulated DC power supply is required to operate motors with a built-in holding brake.
The power is supplied via the 24 V connection (Safe Brake Relay). The voltage tolerances
of the motor holding brakes (24 V ± 10%) and the voltage drops of the connection cables
must be taken into account.
The DC power supply should be set to 26 V. This ensures that the power supply for the
brake remains within the permissible range when the following conditions are fulfilled:
 Using Siemens three-phase motors
 Using Siemens MOTION-CONNECT power cables
 Motor cable lengths: max. 100 m
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
257
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.5 24 V DC Supply Voltage
9.5.2
Overcurrent Protection
Cables that are located on the primary and the primary side of the power supply unit must be
protected from overcurrent.
Primary side protection conforms to the manufacturer's instructions.
Secondary side protection depends on the practical circumstances. Make sure you observe
these points:
● Loading due to loads, including simultaneity factor in response to machine operation
● Current carrying capacity of the conductors used and cables in normal and short-circuit
conditions
● Ambient temperature
● Cable bundling (laying cables in the duct)
● Cable laying method according to EN 60204-1
CAUTION
Laying of cables
Lay connected signal and supply cables such that the ventilation slots on the devices
are not covered.
Do not lay non-shielded cables parallel to power cables.
EN 60204-1, Section 14, can be used to determine the overcurrent protection devices
Circuit breakers from the Siemens LV 1 and LV 1T catalogs are recommended as
overcurrent protection devices on the primary side.
Miniature circuit breakers or SITOP select 6EP1961-2BA00 are recommended as
overcurrent protection devices on the secondary side.
Miniature circuit breakers are recommended as overcurrent protection devices for the cables
and busbars. They can be selected from the Siemens LV 1 and LV 1T catalogs.
The ground potential M must be connected to the protective conductor system (DVC A).
When selecting the circuit breaker, the following standards must be carefully observed:
Standards
EN 61800-5-1
EN 60204-1
IEC 60364-5-52
IEC 60287-1 to -3
EN 60228
UL 508C
Conditions
Ambient temperature 55 °C
Limiting conductor temperature ≥ 75 °C for operation with the rated load current
Maximum cable length:
10 m for the 24 V supply cables
30 m for signal lines without additional connections
Lay the cables so that
● no more than 1 conductor pair is bundled
● Route 24 V conductors/cables separately from cables and conductors that can conduct
operating currents.
Manual
258
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.5 24 V DC Supply Voltage
Table 9- 1
MCBs by conductor cross-section and temperature
Conductor cross-section
1.5
Max. value up to 40 °C
Max. value up to 55 °C
mm2
10 A
6A
2.5 mm2
16 A
10 A
4 mm2
25 A
16 A
mm2
32 A
20 A
6
Select the tripping characteristic of the MCBs to protect the loads against the maximum
current provided in the event of a short circuit of the supply unit.
9.5.3
Overvoltage protection
Overvoltage protection devices are needed if long cables are used.
● Supply cables > 10 m
● Signal cables > 30 m
The following Weidmüller overvoltage protectors are recommended for protecting the
components' 24 V power supply and the 24 V signal cables from overvoltage:
Table 9- 2
Recommendations for overvoltage protection
DC power supply
24 V signal cables
Weidmüller
Item no.: PU III R 24V
Order number: 8860360000
Weidmüller
Item no.: MCZ OVP TAZ
Order number: 844915 0000
Weidmüller GmbH & Co. KG
An der Talle 89
33102 Paderborn, Germany
Phone +49 (0)5252 960 0
Fax +49 (0)5252 960 116
http://www.weidmueller.com
The overvoltage protectors must always be placed next to the area to be protected, e.g. at
the entry point to the control cabinet.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
259
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.5 24 V DC Supply Voltage
9.5.4
Typical 24 V current consumption of the components
A separate 24 V power supply must be used for the SINAMICS S110 drive line-up.
The following table can be used to calculate the 24 V DC power supply. The values for
typical current consumption are used as a basis for configuration.
Table 9- 3
Overview of 24 V DC current consumption
Component
Typical current consumption [ADC]
Control Units
CU305 PN without load
Per digital output
0.8
0.1
CU305 DP without load
Per digital output
0.8
0.1
CU305 CAN without load
Per digital output
0.8
0.1
DRIVE-CLiQ and brake
DRIVE-CLiQ (e.g. motors with DRIVE-CLiQ interface)
Typ. 0.25/Max. 0.45
Brake (e.g. motor holding brake)
Typ. 0.4 to 1.1/Max. 2
Sensor Module Cabinet
SMC10
without/with encoder system
0.20 / 0.35
SMC20
without/with encoder system
0.20 / 0.35
SMC30
without/with encoder system
0.20 / 0.55
Sensor Module External
SME20
without/with encoder system
0.15 / 0.25
SME25
without/with encoder system
0.15 / 0.25
SME120
without/with encoder system
0.20 / 0.30
SME125
without/with encoder system
0.20 / 0.30
Manual
260
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.5 24 V DC Supply Voltage
9.5.5
Selecting power supply units
You are advised to use the devices in the following table. These devices meet the applicable
requirements of EN 60204-1.
Table 9- 4
Recommended SITOP Power
Rated output
current [A]
Phases
Rated input voltage [V]
Working voltage range [V]
Short-circuit current [A]
Order number
5
1/2
120 - 230/230 - 500
85 - 264/176 - 550 AC
Approx. 5.5 (power up),
typ. 15 for 25 ms (operation)
6EP1333-3BA00-8AC0
10
1/2
120 - 230/230 - 500
85 - 264/176 - 550 AC
Approx. 12 (power up),
typ. 30 for 25 ms (operation)
6EP1334-3BA00-8AB0
20
1/2
120/230
85 - 132/176 - 264 AC
Approx. 23 (power up),
typ. 60 for 25 ms (operation)
6EP1336-3BA00-8AA0
3
230/400 to 288/500
320 - 550 3 AC
1/2
120/230
85 - 132/176 - 264 AC
3
230/400 to 288/500
320 - 550 3 AC
40
Table 9- 5
Approx. 46 (power up),
6EP1337-3BA00-8AA0
typ. 120 for 25 ms (operation)
6EP1437-3BA00-8AA0
Recommendation for Control Supply Module
Rated output
current [A]
20
6EP1436-3BA00-8AA0
3
Input voltage range [V]
Short-circuit current [A]
Order number
380 V 3 AC -10% (-15% < 1 min)
to 480 V 3 AC+10%
< 24
6SL3100-1DE22-0AA0
DC 300 – 800
Refer also to Catalog PM21 or NC61.
WARNING
When using external power supplies, e.g. SITOP, the following points must be observed:
 The ground potential M must be connected to the protective conductor terminal (DVC A).
 The power supply must be installed close to the drive line-up.
Ideally, they should be installed on a common mounting plate. If different mounting plates are
used, their electrical interconnection must comply with the EMC installation guideline.
This installation guideline covers protection against electric shock, protection against fire, and
best possible electromagnetic compatibility.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
261
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.6 Arrangement of components and equipment
9.6
Arrangement of components and equipment
9.6.1
General
The arrangement of the components and equipment takes account of
● Space requirements
● Cable routing
● Bending radiuses of the connecting cables
MOTION-CONNECT cables, refer to catalog PM21
● Heat dissipation
● EMC
Components are usually located centrally in a cabinet.
Always observe the mounting clearances necessary above and below the components.
9.6.2
Mounting
The components should be mounted on a conductive mounting surface to ensure low
impedance between the component and the mounting surface. Mounting plates with a
galvanized surface are suitable.
Figure 9-2
Mounting the CU305 onto the Power Module PM340 (frame size FSA)
Manual
262
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.6 Arrangement of components and equipment
Mounting Power Modules with sub-chassis components
A large number of system components are designed as sub-chassis components for PM340
Power Modules with frame sizes FSA to FSE. In such cases, the sub-chassis components
are mounted on the mounting surface, with the PM340 Power Module mounted in front in
order to save space.
Table 9- 6
Available sub-chassis components
FSA
FSB
FSC
FSD
FSE
Line filter
x
-
-
-
-
Line reactor
x
x
x
x
x
Braking resistor
x
x
Motor reactor
x
x
x
x = can be used as a sub-chassis component
-.. not available as an external component (use a Power Module with an integrated line filter)
Up to two sub-chassis components can be mounted in front of one another. For
configurations involving more than two sub-chassis-type components (e.g. line reactor +
motor reactor + braking resistor), individual components must be mounted to the side of the
Power Module.
The following mounting sequence applies to frame sizes FSA to FSC:
Table 9- 7
Mounting sequence for sub-chassis components, starting from the cabinet wall
Frame size
Mounting sequence
FSA
Without an external line filter:
Motor reactor - line reactor - PM340
With external line filter:
Line reactor - line filter - PM340 or
motor reactor - line filter - PM340
FSB
Motor reactor - line reactor - PM340
FSC
Motor reactor - line reactor - PM340
NOTICE
The braking resistor must always be mounted to the side of the Power Module, as it can get
very hot.
Wiring rules for DRIVE-CLiQ
Further information can be found in the manual:
SINAMICS S110 Function Manual Drive Functions
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
263
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.7 Protective connection and equipotential bonding
9.7
Protective connection and equipotential bonding
Protective connections
The SINAMICS S drive system is designed for use in cabinets with a PE conductor
connection.
The protective conductor connection of the SINAMICS components must be connected to
the protective conductor connection of the control cabinet as follows:
Table 9- 8
Conductor cross-section for copper protective connections
Line supply cable in mm2
Copper protective connection in mm2
Up to 16 mm2
The same as the line supply cable
From 16 mm2 to 35 mm2
16 mm2
From 35
mm2
0.5 x line supply cable
For materials other than copper, the cross-section should be increased so that as a
minimum, the same conductivity is attained.
All system components and machine parts must be incorporated in the protection concept.
The protective connection for the motors used must be established through the motor cable.
For EMC reasons, these protective connections should be made at the Power Module.
The drive line-up must be arranged on a common bright mounting plate in order to comply
with the EMC limit values. The mounting plate must be connected to the protective conductor
connection of the control cabinet through a low impedance.
Copper cables with appropriate cross-sections (>2.5 mm²) must be used for the ground
connection of PROFIBUS nodes.
For more information about grounding PROFIBUS, see:
http://www.profibus.com/fileadmin/media/wbt/WBT_Assembly_V10_Dec06/start.html
Equipotential bonding
A mounting plate serves simultaneously as an equipotential bonding surface. This means
that no additional equipotential bonding is required within the drive line-up.
If a common bright mounting plate is not available, then equally good equipotential bonding
must be established using cable cross-sections as listed in the table above or, as a
minimum, with the same conductivity.
Manual
264
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.7 Protective connection and equipotential bonding
When installing components on standard mounting rails, the data listed in the table also
apply to the equipotential bonding. If only smaller connection cross-sections are permissible
at the components, then the largest possible cross-section should be used, e.g. 6 mm2 for
SMC. These requirements also apply to distributed components located outside the control
cabinet.
CAUTION
An equipotential bonding conductor with a cross-section of at least 25 mm² must be used
between components in a system that are located at a distance from each other. If an
equipotential bonding conductor is not used, high leakage currents that could destroy the
Control Unit or other PROFIBUS nodes can be conducted via the PROFIBUS cable.
No equipotential bonding conductors are required for PROFIBUS inside a control cabinet.
For PROFIBUS connections between different buildings or parts of buildings, an
equipotential bonding must be laid parallel to the PROFIBUS cable. The following crosssections must be observed in accordance with IEC 60364-5-54:
● Copper 6 mm²
● Aliminium 16 mm²
● Steel 50 mm²
For more information about equipotential bonding for PROFIBUS, see:
http://www.profibus.com/fileadmin/media/wbt/WBT_Assembly_V10_Dec06/start.html
NOTICE
If the above information about equipotential bonding is not taken into account, this can
cause the field bus interfaces to malfunction or devices to malfunction.
Note
PROFINET
For installation guidelines and information of protective grounding and equipotential bonding
for all PROFINET types and topologies, refer to DOWNLOADS at:
http://www.profibus.com
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
265
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.8 Notes on electrical cabinet cooling
9.8
Notes on electrical cabinet cooling
9.8.1
General
Electrical cabinets can be cooled, using among other things the following:
● filtered fans
● heat exchangers or
● cooling units.
The decision in favor of one of these methods will depend on the prevailing ambient
conditions and the cooling power required.
The air routing within the electrical cabinet and the cooling clearances specified here must
be observed. No other components or cables must be located in these areas.
CAUTION
If you do not observe the guidelines for installing SINAMICS equipment in the cabinet, this
can reduce the service life of the equipment and result in premature component failure.
You must take into account the following specifications when mounting/installing SINAMICS
components:
● Cooling clearance
● Cable routing
● Air guidance, air-conditioner
Table 9- 9
Cooling clearances around the components
Component
Clearance above and below
Lateral clearance
in mm and (inches)
in mm and (inches)
CU305 PN
50 (1.97)
0
CU305 DP
50 (1.97)
0
CU305 CAN
50 (1.97)
0
SMCxx
50 (1.97)
0
Line filter
100 (3.93)
Line reactor
100 (3.93)
0
PM340 blocksize, frame size FSA
100 (3.93)
30 (1.18) 1)
PM340 blocksize, frame size FSB
100 (3.93)
40 (1.57) 1)
PM340 blocksize, frame size FSC
125 (4.92)
50 (1.97) 1)
PM340 blocksize, frame sizes FSD and FSE
300 (11.81)
0
PM340 blocksize, frame size FSF
350 (13.77)
0
1) Only applies at ambient temperatures >40° C or where sub-chassis components are being
used (e.g. line reactors) below the PM340. Otherwise, the clearance is 0 mm.
Manual
266
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.8 Notes on electrical cabinet cooling
0RXQWLQJVXUIDFH
:DUPGLVFKDUJHGDLU
$LULQOHW
Figure 9-3
9.8.2
PP
PP
Cooling clearances
Ventilation
The SINAMICS equipment is ventilated separately by means of integrated fans and is in
some cases cooled by means of natural convection.
The cooling air must flow through the components vertically from bottom (cooler region) to
top (region heated by operation).
If filtered fans, heat exchangers, or air conditioners are used, you must ensure that the air is
flowing in the right direction. You must also ensure that the warm air can escape at the top.
The cooling clearance above and below must be observed.
Note
Cables must not be routed on the components; the ventilation meshes must not be covered.
Cold air must not be allowed to blow directly onto electronic equipment.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
267
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.8 Notes on electrical cabinet cooling
Note
The distance between the blow-out aperture of the air conditioner and the electronic
equipment must be at least 200 mm.
&RROLQJXQLW
6ZLWFKLQJFDELQHW
Figure 9-4
Examples of cabinet ventilation
CAUTION
The air guidance and arrangement of the cooling equipment must be chosen in such a way
as to prevent condensation from forming.
If necessary, cabinet enclosure heating may have to be installed.
Manual
268
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.8 Notes on electrical cabinet cooling
If air conditioners are used, the relative air humidity of the expelled air increases as the air in
the air conditioner cools and may exceed the dew point. If the relative humidity of the air
entering the SINAMICS equipment is over 80% for an extended period of time, the insulation
in the equipment may fail to function properly due to electrochemical reactions (refer to
System Overview). Using air baffle plates, for example, you must ensure that the cold air
expelled from the air conditioner mixes with warm air in the cabinet before it enters the unit.
This reduces the relative air humidity to uncritical values.
9.8.3
Power loss of components during rated operation
9.8.3.1
General information
The tables below give details of power loss for components during rated operation.
The characteristic values apply for the following conditions:
● Line supply voltage for Power Modules 1-ph. 200 V AC to 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC ±10 %.
● Rated pulse frequency of the Power Modules 4 kHz
● Operating components at their unit rating
9.8.3.2
Power loss for Control Units and Sensor Modules
Table 9- 10
Overview of power loss during rated operation for Control Units and Sensor Modules
Component
Unit
Power loss
W
< 20
Control Units
CU305 PN
CU305 DP
W
< 20
CU305 CAN
W
< 20
SMC10
W
< 10
SMC20
W
< 10
SMC30
W
< 10
Sensor Modules
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
269
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.8 Notes on electrical cabinet cooling
9.8.3.3
Table 9- 11
Power loss for line reactors and line filters
Overview of power loss during rated operation for line reactors and line filters
Frame size
Line supply voltage
Unit
Power loss
50/60 Hz
0.9 A/2.3 A
FSA
1-ph. 200 to 240 V AC
W
12.5/15
3.9 A
FSA
1-ph. 200 to 240 V AC
W
11.5/14.5
1.3 A/1.7 A
FSA
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
6/7
2.2 A/3.1 A
FSA
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
12.5/15
Rated output current In
Line reactors for Blocksize PM340
4.1 A
FSA
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
7.5/9
5.9 A/7.7 A
FSB
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
9 / 11
10.2 A
FSB
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
27 / 32
18 A/25 A
FSC
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
98 / 118
32 A
FSC
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
37 / 44
38 A/45 A/60 A
FSD
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
90 / 115
75 A/90 A
FSE
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
170 / 215
110 A/145 A/178 A
FSF
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
280 / 360
Line filters for Blocksize PM340
FSA
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
<5
Manual
270
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.8 Notes on electrical cabinet cooling
9.8.3.4
Table 9- 12
Power loss for Power Modules
Overview of power loss during rated operation for Power Modules
Rated output current Irated/Unit rating based on
Irated
Frame size
Line supply voltage
Unit
Power loss
FSA
1-ph. 200 to 240 V AC
W
60
Blocksize PM340
0.9 A/0.12 kW
2.3 A/0.37 kW
FSA
1-ph. 200 to 240 V AC
W
75
3.9 A/0.75 kW
FSA
1-ph. 200 to 240 V AC
W
110
1.3 A/0.37 kW
FSA
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
100
1.7 A/0.55 kW
FSA
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
100
2.2 A/0.75 kW
FSA
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
100
3.1 A/1.1 kW
FSA
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
110
4.1 A/1.5 kW
FSA
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
110
5.9 A/2.2 kW
FSB
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
140
7.7 A/3 kW
FSB
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
160
10.2 A/4 kW
FSB
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
180
18 A/7.5 kW
FSC
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
240
25 A/11 kW
FSC
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
300
32 A/15 kW
FSC
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
400
38 A/18.5 kW
FSD
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
380
45 A/22 kW
FSD
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
510
60 A/30 kW
FSD
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
690
75 A/37 kW
FSE
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
990
90 A/45 kW
FSE
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
1210
110 A/55 kW
FSF
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
1420
145 A/75 kW
FSF
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
1930
178 A/90 kW
FSF
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
2310
38 A/18.5 kW
FSD
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
90 1)
60 A/30 kW
FSD
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
130 1)
75 A/37 kW
FSE
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
160 1)
90 A/45 kW
FSE
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
190 1)
110 A/55 kW
FSF
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
210 1)
178 A/90 kW
FSF
3-ph. 380 to 480 V AC
W
350 1)
Blocksize Liquid Cooled PM340
1) Power loss to ambient air
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
271
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.8 Notes on electrical cabinet cooling
Manual
272
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cooling circuit and coolant properties
10.1
Cooling circuit requirements
10.1.1
Technical cooling circuits
10
Technical cooling circuits can be divided into three systems:
1. Closed cooling circuits (recommended)
In closed systems, the circuit coolant is separated from the surrounding atmosphere,
which prevents the ingress of oxygen. The coolant is only routed through the SINAMICS
devices, the components required for cooling and, if necessary, a motor. The heat is
dissipated to the atmosphere indirectly by means of heat exchangers. The system should
ideally function without losing any coolant and, once filled, should not need any water to
be added. The composition of the coolant can be adjusted as required (e.g. by using
desalinated water and adding anti-corrosion agents). It either does not change at all
during operation, or changes only in a defined manner.
The closed cooling circuit is recommended as a standard solution.
2. Open cooling circuit
The coolant is routed not only through the SINAMICS devices and components required
for cooling, but also through external devices.
The heat transferred to the circuit coolant evaporates via a cooling tower. This
evaporation causes the coolant to become more concentrated (densification) because
water molecules escape, while dissolved substances remain in the coolant. During
operation, therefore, the composition of the coolant changes significantly, which means
that it must be monitored and topped up continuously.
3. Semi-open cooling circuit
Oxygen can only enter the coolant via the pressure compensator. Otherwise, see 1.
Semi-open cooling circuits are permitted.
10.1.2
Cooling system requirements
Open cooling systems must never be used for liquid-cooled Power Modules. A closed
cooling circuit with a membrane expansion tank (MET), safety valve (SV), and heat
exchanger (HE) is recommended, which connects the cooling circuit to an external cooler
(refer also to the chapter titled "Using heat exchangers").
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
273
Cooling circuit and coolant properties
10.1 Cooling circuit requirements
Requirements
● A particle filter (particle size < 100 µm) must be installed in the cooling circuit's supply line
to prevent foreign particles from being washed in.
● Mixed installations should be avoided wherever possible.
● The permissible pressures in the cooling system must be observed.
● Cavitation must be prevented in the cooling system.
● Equipotential bonding must be provided between the components in the cooling system.
● The customer must take measures to protect the devices against condensation
● An anti-corrosion agent and, if necessary, a biocide should be mixed into the coolant.
● If there is a risk of frost, preventive measures must be taken during operation, storage,
and transportation (e.g. emptying and blowing out with air, additional heating).
● The requirements of the coolant in terms of its properties (temperature, chemical
characteristics, etc.) must be observed.
Recommendations
● To ensure mechanical decoupling, the devices should be connected by means of hoses.
● To prevent blockages and corrosion, you are advised to install a flushback filter in the
circuit (so that residues can be rinsed out when the system is running).
● The power units should be connected to the cooling circuit by means of shut-off fittings so
that they can be disconnected from the cooling circuit for servicing or repair without
having to empty the entire cooling system. A cooling water hose (EPDM) can be used to
connect the shut-off fitting to the power unit. The coolant connections must never be
closed if cooling liquid is still present in the device. Reason: If the cooling fluid expands
due to heat, the pressure can build up beyond permissible levels and cause the heat sink
to burst.
Manual
274
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cooling circuit and coolant properties
10.1 Cooling circuit requirements
10.1.3
Cooling circuit configuration
The liquid-cooled Power Modules are designed to be connected in parallel to the cooling
circuit. The pressure drop in the joint supply and return lines is to be kept at negligible levels
by choosing a sufficiently large pipe diameter.
0$*
3
:7
:
36
3
$
),/
Figure 10-1
Example of a closed cooling circuit
The supply line (P1) has a differential pressure p compared to the return line (P2); this
pressure must be in the range 70 kPa to 200 kPa. This ensures that every connected unit
has the required volume of cooling liquid flowing through it. Pressure P1 and P2 with respect
to the atmosphere must not exceed 600 kPa.
A pump's pressure depends on the volumetric flow, so the pressure created will depend on
the number of components which are connected. At the minimum differential pressure p1
(measured between the supply and return lines of the individual component), the volume of
coolant required to enable the component to achieve its unit rating or rated current is to flow
through each component. At the maximum differential pressure p2 (measured between the
supply and return lines of the individual component), the volumetric flow must not result in
damage to the component, for example by means of cavitation. If necessary, pressure
reducing valves such as baffle plates will have to be installed in the piping; these must be
easy to access, clean, and/or replace.
When the pump is switched off, static pressure occurs in the system. The static pressure can
be influenced by the primary pressure of the membrane expansion tank (MET) and should
be at least 30 kPa on the pump's suction side. If the static pressure is too low, the pump may
be damaged due to cavitation during operation. If necessary, note any differing minimum
pressure values from the pump manufacturer. When components are installed at different
heights, the geodesic pressure caused by the height difference must be taken into account
(1 m height difference corresponds to 10 kPa).
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
275
Cooling circuit and coolant properties
10.1 Cooling circuit requirements
When the pump is switched on, a (location-dependent) flow pressure is present in the
cooling circuit, which must be determined from the pump characteristic curve and the
volume-flow-dependent pressure drop. Characteristics have been specified for the pressure
drop of the Power Modules. The pressure drop in the filter and, if applicable, an additional
pressure drop in the connection pipes must be added to this pressure drop (70 kPa for H2O).
Up to 50 kPa must be added for the pressure drop in a (contaminated) filter and in
connection pipes. The intersection of the pump characteristic curve and the pressure drop of
the whole cooling system yields the volumetric flow Vrated of the coolant at this operating
point.
3XPSFKDUDFWHULVWLFFXUYH
S
3UHVVXUHGURSLQ
FRROLQJV\VWHP
S
Q
Figure 10-2
9Q
9
Pump characteristic curve
Permissible system pressure
The maximum permissible system pressure is 600 kPa.
If a pump that is capable of exceeding this maximum permissible system pressure is used,
the customer must take steps (e.g. safety valve p ≤ 600 kPa, pressure control, or similar) to
ensure that the maximum pressure limit is not exceeded.
Manual
276
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cooling circuit and coolant properties
10.1 Cooling circuit requirements
Permissible pressure difference
The maximum permissible pressure difference for a heat sink is 200 kPa. Higher pressure
differences significantly increase the risk of cavitation and abrasion. The lowest possible
differential pressure between the coolant in the supply and return lines should be selected to
allow pumps with a flat characteristic to be used.
G3DVIG9GWIRU+2
3URKLELWHGUDQJH
G3>N3D@
0D[LPXPSUHVVXUH
GLIIHUHQWLDO
G9GW>OPLQ@
Figure 10-3
Pressure difference as a function of volumetric flow
Pressure difference and pressure drop when using coolant mixtures
If a mixture of Antifrogen N and H2O is used as a coolant, the rated pressure must be
calculated according to the mixing ratio. The following table specifies the pressure drop
across components at different coolant temperatures for a coolant with mixing ratio 45 %
Antifrogen N.
Table 10- 1
Pressure drop at different coolant temperatures for Antifrogen N/H2O: 45 %
dV/dt H2O
[l/min]
dP H2O
[kPa]
dP Antifrogen N
0 °C
[kPa]
dP Antifrogen N
20 °C
[kPa]
dP Antifrogen N
45 °C
[kPa]
dP Antifrogen N
50 °C
[kPa]
8
70
121
97
81
78
The characteristic curves for the pressure drop across the heatsinks as a function of
volumetric flow vary depending on the temperature and the Antifrogen N / water coolant mix.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
277
Cooling circuit and coolant properties
10.1 Cooling circuit requirements
GSDVG9GWIRUYDULRXVFRRODQWV
GS>N3D@
G9GW>OPLQ@
Figure 10-4
r&+
r&$QWLIURJHQ1
ഒ$QWLIURJHQ1
r&$QWLIURJHQ1
r&$QWLIURJHQ1
r&$QWLIURJHQ1
r&$QWULIURJHQ1
Pressure difference as a function of volumetric flow for various coolants and temperatures
Operating pressure
The operating pressure must be set according to the flow conditions in the supply and return
lines of the cooling circuit. The required coolant flow rate per time unit must be set according
to the technical data of the components. The components are normalized to a rated pressure
of 70 kPa (for coolant type H2O) via a baffle plate.
Layout of the components
The components should be laid out in the system in such a way that the overall length of the
supply and drain lines is the same for every SINAMICS component.
Water cooling systems with series-connected SINAMICS devices are not permitted.
Dimensioning the cooling circuit
Recommendation for dimensioning the cooling circuit:
The differential pressure between the supply and return lines should be selected so that:
ΣdPi < dPSyst < ΣdPi + 30 kPa
Manual
278
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cooling circuit and coolant properties
10.1 Cooling circuit requirements
The individual pressure drops Pi represent the pressure drops of components (heat
exchanger, piping, 70 kPa for the SINAMICS devices connected in parallel, valves, dirt traps,
pipe bends, etc.).
Coolant pipes must be routed with extreme care. The pipes must never come into contact
with electrically live components. An insulation clearance of > 13 mm must always be
maintained between pipes and live parts. The pipes must be securely mounted and checked
for leaks.
10.1.4
Installation
A closed stainless-steel cooling circuit, preferably combined with monitoring of the coolant
quality, is strongly recommended to ensure the longest possible service life for the heat sink.
CAUTION
Coolant pipes must be routed with extreme care. The pipes must be securely mounted and
checked for leaks. They must never come into contact with live components.
Materials and connections
To minimize the electrochemical processes taking place in the cooling system, the materials
must be coordinated with one another accordingly. For this reason, mixed installations (i.e. a
combination of different materials, such as copper, brass, iron, zinc, or halogenated plastic
(PVC hoses and seals)) should not be used or should be limited to an absolute minimum.
The valves and connections required in the cooling system must be made of stainless steel
(V2A or V4A steel; NIROSTA austenite).
The following materials can be used for the cooling system piping:
● Pipes and corrugated piping made of stainless steel (V2A or V4A steel; NIROSTA
austenite)
● Hoses made of EPDM/EPDM with an electrical resistance <109 ohms (e.g. Semperflex
FKD by Semperit; http://www.semperit.at)
● DEMITEL® hoses made of PE/EPDM (Telle; http://www.telle.de)
● Secure with clips that comply with DIN2871, available from Telle, for example.
All control cabinets must be designed with a PE bar and a good electrical connection must
be established between them.
NOTICE
The sealing materials must be free of chlorides, graphite, and carbon (Viton® or EPDM).
Teflon-based seals are not permitted.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
279
Cooling circuit and coolant properties
10.1 Cooling circuit requirements
Note
When non-conductive hoses are used, particular attention must be paid to the equipotential
bonding of all components. (Refer to the chapter titled "Equipotential bonding".)
Note
Once installed, the cooling system must be checked to ensure that it is properly sealed.
10.1.5
Preventing cavitation
The following applies to all cooling circuits:
● The cooling circuit must always be designed in such a way that the pressure
compensator is located on the suction side of the pump (if possible, directly on the
pump).
● The minimum pressure on the suction side of the pump must be approximately 30 kPa, or
the geodesic height from the reservoir to the pump suction side must be > 3 m.
● The pressure drop across a SINAMICS device must not exceed 200 kPa in continuous
operation, otherwise the high volumetric flow can increase the risk of cavitation and/or
abrasion damage.
● The guidelines provided in "Information about configuring cooling circuits" below
regarding series connections and maximum pressure must also be followed.
10.1.6
Commissioning
When commissioning the cooling water circuit, the following sequence must be observed:
● Ventilate the heat sink the first time the devices are filled.
● Remove the fixing glands located in front of the vent valve.
● Perform ventilation.
● Close the vent valve.
● Screw the fixing glands tight again.
● Check the seals.
● Set the operating pressure according to the flow conditions of the cooling water system in
the supply and return lines.
● Set the required cooling water flow rate per time unit.
CAUTION
Ventilation must only be performed when the system is at zero voltage.
Manual
280
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cooling circuit and coolant properties
10.2 Coolant requirements
10.2
Coolant requirements
10.2.1
Coolant properties
Water or a water/anti-freeze mixture that meets the relevant requirements can be used as a
cooling medium. The cooling medium must be chemically neutral, clean, and not contain any
solids.
The cooling water must fulfill the following requirements over the long term:
● Chemically neutral, clean, and free of solids
● Max. inlet temperature: 50 ℃
● Max. outlet temperature: 55 ℃
● System pressure 600 kPa
● Max. size of any particles transported: 100 μm
● pH value: 6.0 to 8.0
● Chlorides < 200 ppm
● Sulfates < 600 ppm
● Loose materials < 340 ppm
● Total hardness < 170 ppm
● Electrical conductivity < 500 µS/cm
NOTICE
Condensation must not be allowed to form on the SINAMICS S110 equipment as a result of
supercooling. The temperature of the cooling water may have to be regulated.
NOTICE
The heat sink is made of non-seawater-proof material, which means that it must not be
cooled directly with seawater.
Note
Tap water is not generally suitable for use in the cooling circuit. It can be mixed with deionized water. Losses must always be replenished with de-ionized water.
The cooling water should be checked 3 months after the cooling circuit is filled for the first
time and, subsequently, once a year. If the cooling water becomes cloudy, is colored, or
becomes contaminated by mould spores, the cooling circuit must be cleaned and refilled.
An inspection glass should be provided in the cooling circuit to make it easier to check the
cooling water.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
281
Cooling circuit and coolant properties
10.2 Coolant requirements
10.2.2
Anti-corrosion additives (inhibitors)
Inhibitor without anti-freeze effect
Nalco 00GE056 (ONDEO Nalco; http://www.ondeonalco.com) must be used as an anticorrosion agent. The concentration of anti-corrosion agent in the cooling water should be
between 2,000 ppm and 2,500 ppm (200 to 250 ml/100 liters of cooling water).
A prerequisite for the inhibitor is the specified coolant, which must not contain any
magnesium carbonate. Control kits can be ordered from Nalco to check the inhibitor
concentration.
10.2.3
Anti-freeze additives
Antifrogen N (Clariant; http://www.clariant.com) is recommended as an antifreeze. The
proportion of antifreeze must be between 20% and 30%. This ensures frost protection in
temperatures down to -10 °C.
NOTICE
If the proportion of antifreeze added is greater than 30%, this can inhibit the transfer of heat
and prevent the units from functioning correctly.
NOTICE
Cooling water mixtures with Antifrogen N are highly conductive. In the event of leakage, the
insulating systems must be cleaned.
NOTICE
When EPDM hoses are used, oily anti-corrosion-agent additives must not be used because
such additives can corrode and destroy EPDM.
Note
You must always bear in mind that the kinematic viscosity of the cooling water changes
when antifreeze is added, which means that the pump power must be adjusted accordingly.
Antifrogen N contains corrosion inhibitors which permanently protect the metal in the cooling
system against corrosion. The proportion of Antifrogen N should always be >20%, otherwise
the mixture becomes corrosive.
Inhibitors and Antifrogen N must not be mixed.
Manual
282
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cooling circuit and coolant properties
10.2 Coolant requirements
10.2.4
Biocide additives (only if required)
Closed cooling circuits with soft water (°DH>4) are susceptible to microbes. The risk of
corrosion caused by microbes is virtually non-existent in chlorinated drinking water systems.
If Antifrogen N antifreeze is used with a concentration of 20% or higher, it can be assumed
that there is an adequate biocide effect.
The following types of bacteria are encountered in practice:
● Slime-forming bacteria
● Corrosive bacteria
● Iron-depositing bacteria
The type of bacteria determines the suitability of a biocide. At least one water analysis per
year (to determine the number of bacterial colonies) is recommended. Suitable biocides are
available, for example, from Nalco (Manufacturer: Nalco).
● We recommend adding partial doses of Nalco N 77352 (ONDEO Nalco;
http://www.ondeonalco.com) twice a month, rather than adding an entire dose all at once
(i.e. to introduce pauses in the dosing process).
Dosage: 5 – 15 mg/100 liters of cooling water. This product has no adverse effect on
Nalco 00GE056 corrosion inhibitor.
Note
The type of bacteria determines the biocide.
The manufacturer's recommendations must be followed as regards the dosage and
compatibility with any inhibitor used.
Biocides and Antifrogen N must not be mixed.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
283
Cooling circuit and coolant properties
10.3 Anti-condensation measures
10.3
Anti-condensation measures
The customer must take measures to protect the devices against condensation.
Condensation occurs when the inlet temperature of the coolant is significantly lower than
room temperature (ambient temperature). The permissible temperature difference between
coolant and air varies as a function of the relative humidity φ of the ambient air. The air
temperature at which the aqueous phase precipitates is referred to as the "dew point".
The table below shows the dew points (in °C) for an atmospheric pressure of 100 kPa
(≈ installation altitude: 0 to 500 m). If the temperature of the coolant is below the specified
value, condensation may occur (i.e. the coolant temperature must always be ≥ the dew point
temperature).
Table 10- 2
Dew point temperature as a function of relative air humidity φ and room temperature at an installation altitude
of 0 m.
T room
[°C]
Φ=20%
Φ=30%
Φ=40%
Φ=50%
Φ=60%
Φ=70%
Φ=80%
Φ=85%
Φ=90%
Φ=95%
Φ=100%
10
<0
<0
<0
0.2
2.7
4.8
6.7
7.6
8.4
9.2
10
20
<0
2
6
9.3
12
14.3
16.4
17.4
18.3
19.1
20
25
0.6
6.3
10.5
13.8
16.7
19.1
21.2
22.2
23.2
24.1
24.9
30
4.7
10.5
14.9
18.4
21.3
23.8
26.1
27.1
28.1
29
29.9
35
8.7
14.8
19.3
22.9
26
28.6
30.9
32
33
34
34.9
38
11.1
17.4
22
25.7
28.8
31.5
33.8
34.9
36
36.9
37.9
40
12.8
19.1
23.7
27.5
30.6
33.4
35.8
36.9
37.9
38.9
39.9
45
16.8
23.3
28.2
32
35.3
38.1
40.6
41.8
42.9
43.9
44.9
50
20.8
27.5
32.6
36.6
40
42.9
45.5
46.6
47.8
48.9
49.9
The dew point also depends on the absolute pressure (i.e. the installation altitude).
The dew points for low atmospheric pressure are lower than those at an altitude of 0 m (i.e. it
is always acceptable to calculate the coolant supply temperature for an altitude of 0 m).
For short periods of condensation in Power Modules PM340 Liquid Cooled, framed size
FSF, the condensate may be collected inside the components and removed by a hose (see
dimensional drawing).
Manual
284
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Cooling circuit and coolant properties
10.4 Equipotential bonding
10.4
Equipotential bonding
All components in the cooling system (SINAMICS units, heat exchanger, piping system,
pump, pressure compensator, etc.) must be connected to an equipotential bonding system.
A copper bar or stranded copper with the appropriate conductor cross-sections must be used
for this purpose to eliminate electrochemical processes.
If the installation comprises more than one control cabinet, they must be bolted together with
good conductivity (e.g. bolt cabinet cross-beams together directly at several points to
establish a conductive connection). This eliminates potential differences and, in turn, the risk
of electrochemical corrosion. A PE bar must be installed in every cabinet (including the
recooling system) and the individual bars interconnected.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
285
Cooling circuit and coolant properties
10.4 Equipotential bonding
Manual
286
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Service and maintenance
11.1
11
Safety information
DANGER
Only Siemens customer service, repair centers that have been authorized by Siemens or
authorized personnel may repair drive equipment. Al of the persons involved must have indepth knowledge of all of the warnings and operating instructions as listed in this Manual.
All damaged parts or components must be replaced. Spare parts are available on the
Internet at: http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/16612315
DANGER
Before starting any work, after the specified waiting time has elapsed, carefully measure
the voltage! The voltage can be measured between the DC link terminals DCP and DCN
and must be below 42.2 V DC.
DANGER
If the auxiliary 230 V AC supplies are present, then a hazardous voltage is present at the
components even when the main switch is in the open state.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
287
Service and maintenance
11.2 Service and maintenance for components, Blocksize format
11.2
Service and maintenance for components, Blocksize format
11.2.1
Replacing hardware components
NOTICE
Hardware components may only be replaced when in the no-voltage state!
The following components can be replaced with replacement/exchange components with the
same Order No.:
● Power Modules
● DRIVE-CLiQ components
● Control Units
11.2.2
Replacing the fan
Fans are available as spare parts for all frame sizes of PM340.
NOTICE
Only trained personnel may replace the fan, observing ESD guidelines.
Preconditions
1. Disconnect the PM340 from the power supply.
2. Remove the device or the drive line-up.
Manual
288
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Service and maintenance
11.2 Service and maintenance for components, Blocksize format
Frame size FSA/FSB/FSC
Note
You will require a cross-tip screwdriver to remove and install the fan of the PM340 for frame
sizes FSA to FSC.
Figure 11-1
PM340 fan replacement, frame size FSA
1. Remove the fixing screws.
2. Remove the connector.
3. Remove the fan.
4. Insert the new fan.
5. Insert the connector.
6. Tighten the mounting screws (0.4 Nm tightening torque).
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
289
Service and maintenance
11.2 Service and maintenance for components, Blocksize format
Figure 11-2
PM340 fan replacement, frame size FSB/FSC (0.4 Nm tightening torque)
Manual
290
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Service and maintenance
11.2 Service and maintenance for components, Blocksize format
Frame sizes FSD/FSE
Figure 11-3
PM340 fan replacement, frame sizes FSD/FSE
1. Remove the cover.
2. Remove both connectors and both fans.
3. Insert the new fans and reattach both connectors.
4. Close the cover.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
291
Service and maintenance
11.2 Service and maintenance for components, Blocksize format
Frame size FSF
Figure 11-4
PM340 fan replacement, frame size FSF
1. Unfasten the screws and remove the cover.
2. Remove both connectors and both fans.
3. Insert the new fans, attach both connectors, close the cover and fasten the screws
(3.0 Nm tightening torque).
Manual
292
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Service and maintenance
11.3 Forming the DC link capacitors
11.3
Forming the DC link capacitors
CAUTION
If the Power Modules are kept in storage for more than two years, the DC link capacitors
have to be reformed. If this is not performed, the units could be damaged when they are
switched on.
If the cabinet is commissioned within two years of its date of manufacture, the DC link
capacitors do not need to be reformed. The date of manufacture can be taken from the serial
number on the rating plate.
Note
It is important that the storage period is calculated from the date of manufacture and not from
the date that the equipment was shipped.
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture can be determined from the following assignment to the serial
number (e.g. T-S92067000015 for 2004, September):
Table 11- 1
Production year and month
Character
Year of manufacture
Character
Month of manufacture
S
2004
1 to 9
January to September
T
2005
O
October
U
2006
N
November
V
2007
D
December
W
2008
X
2009
A
2010
B
2011
The serial number is found on the rating plate.
When DC link capacitors are formed, a defined voltage is connected to them and a defined
current flows so that the appropriate capacitor characteristics are re-established for them to
be re-used as DC link capacitors.
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
293
Service and maintenance
11.3 Forming the DC link capacitors
Forming circuit
The forming circuit can be established using incandescent lamps or alternatively, resistors.
Components required for reforming outside the drive line-up
● 1 fuse switch, triple 400 V / 10 A or double 230 V / 10 A
● Cable 1.5 mm2
● 3 incandescent lamps 230 V/100 W for a line voltage of 380 to 480 V 3-ph AC.
Alternatively, use three 1 kΩ / 100 W resistors (e.g. GWK150J1001KLX000 from Vishay)
instead of the incandescent lamps.
● 2 incandescent lamps 230 V/100 W for a line voltage of 200 to 240 V 1-ph AC.
Alternatively, use 2 1 kΩ / 100 W resistors (e.g. GWK150J1001KLX000 from Vishay)
instead of the incandescent lamps.
● Various Small components, such as lamp socket, etc.
DANGER
Dangerously high voltage levels are still present in the cabinet up to 5 minutes after it has
been disconnected due to the DC link capacitors. It is only permissible to work on the
equipment or at the DC link terminals after this time has expired.
/LQHVXSSO\YROWDJH
/
/
/
3(
)XVHLVRODWRUV
,QFDQGHVFHQWODPSV
3RZHU0RGXOH
0RWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
8
9
3(
:
0RGXOHWREHIRUPHG
Figure 11-5
Forming circuit for 3-ph AC Power Modules with incandescent lamps
Manual
294
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Service and maintenance
11.3 Forming the DC link capacitors
/LQHVXSSO\YROWDJH
/
/
/
3(
)XVHLVRODWRUV
5HVLVWRUV
˽
3RZHU0RGXOH
ൺ
ൺ ˽
ൺ
ൺ ˽
ൺ
ൺ
0RWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
8
9
:
3(
0RGXOHWREHIRUPHG
Figure 11-6
Forming circuit for 3-ph AC Power Modules with resistors
/LQHVXSSO\YROWDJH
/
1
3(
)XVHLVRODWRUV
5HVLVWRUV
˽
3RZHU0RGXOH
ൺ
ൺ ˽
ൺ
ൺ
0RWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
8
9
:
3(
0RGXOHWREHIRUPHG
Figure 11-7
Forming circuit for 1-ph AC Power Modules with resistors
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
295
Service and maintenance
11.3 Forming the DC link capacitors
Procedure
● Make sure that the device does not receive a power-on command (e.g. from the keyboard
or terminal block).
● Connect the forming circuit.
● While forming, the incandescent lamps must become less bright or go completely dark.
If the incandescent lamps continue to be brightly lit, a fault has occurred in the drive unit
or in the wiring.
● To form using resistors, the modules must remain in the circuit for approx. 1h. The resistors
will become very hot if there is a fault in the unit (surface temperature > 80°C).
Manual
296
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Service and maintenance
11.4 Spare parts
11.4
Spare parts
Spare parts are available on the Internet at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/16612315
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
297
Service and maintenance
11.5 Recycling and disposal
11.5
Recycling and disposal
The applicable national guidelines must be observed when disposing of the product.
The products described in this manual are extensively recyclable on account of the low-toxic
composition of the materials used. For environmentally-compliant recycling and disposal of
your electronic waste, please contact a company for the disposal of electronic waste.
Manual
298
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
A
Appendix A
A.1
Spring-loaded terminals/screw terminal
Connectable conductor cross-sections of spring-loaded terminals
The type of spring-loaded terminal can be taken from the interface description of the
particular component.
Table A- 1
Spring-loaded terminals
Spring-loaded terminal type
1
2
Connectable conductor crosssections
Flexible
With wire end ferrule, without plastic sleeve
With wire end ferrule, with plastic sleeve
Insulation stripping length
9 mm
Tool
Screwdriver 0.4 x 2.0 mm
Connectable conductor crosssections
Flexible
Insulation stripping length
8 to 9 mm
Tool
Screwdriver 0.4 x 2.0 mm
0.14 mm2 to 1.5 mm2
0.25 mm2 to 1.5 mm2
0.25 mm2 to 0.5 mm2
0.08 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
Connectable conductor cross-sections of the screw terminal
Table A- 2
Screw terminal
Screw terminal
Connectable conductor cross-sections
Rigid, flexible
With wire end ferrule, without plastic sleeve
With wire end ferrule, with plastic sleeve
Insulation stripping length
7 mm
Tool
Screwdriver 0.6 x 3.5 mm
Tightening torque
0.5 to 0.6 Nm
0.08 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
299
Appendix A
A.1 Spring-loaded terminals/screw terminal
Manual
300
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Appendix B
B.1
B
List of abbreviations
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
301
Appendix B
B.1 List of abbreviations
Manual
302
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Appendix B
B.1 List of abbreviations
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
303
Appendix B
B.1 List of abbreviations
Manual
304
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Appendix B
B.1 List of abbreviations
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
305
Appendix B
B.1 List of abbreviations
Manual
306
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Appendix B
B.1 List of abbreviations
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
307
Appendix B
B.1 List of abbreviations
Manual
308
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Appendix B
B.1 List of abbreviations
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
309
Appendix B
B.1 List of abbreviations
Manual
310
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
6,1$0,&6GRFXPHQWDWLRQRYHUYLHZ
*HQHUDOGRFXPHQWDWLRQFDWDORJV
6,1$0,&6
*
'
,QYHUWHU&KDVVLV8QLWV
N:WRN:
6,1$0,&6
*
*
6,027,21
6,1$0,&6
6
6,1$0,&6
6
6
30
'
'ULYH&RQYHUWHU&KDVVLV8QLWV 6,027,216,1$0,&66DQG
'ULYH&RQYHUWHU&DELQHW8QLWV 0RWRUVIRU3URGXFWLRQ0DFKLQHV
'
6,1$0,&66&KDVVLV8QLWV
&KDVVLV)RUPDW8QLWVDQG&DELQHW0RGXOHV
6,1$0,&66
&RQYHUWHU&DELQHW8QLWV
0DQXIDFWXUHUVHUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,1$0,&6
*
*HWWLQJ6WDUWHG
2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
/LVW0DQXDO
6,1$0,&6
6,1$0,&6
*
*
*
2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
/LVW0DQXDO
*HWWLQJ6WDUWHG
2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
+DUGZDUH,QVWDOODWLRQ0DQXDO
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO6DIHW\,QWHJUDWHG
/LVW0DQXDO
6,1$0,&6
2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
/LVW0DQXDO
6,1$0,&6
*0
60
*/
6/
2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
/LVW0DQXDO
0DQXIDFWXUHUVHUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,1$0,&6
6
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDO
*HWWLQJ6WDUWHG
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO
/LVW0DQXDO
6,1$0,&6
6,1$0,&6
6
6
*HWWLQJ6WDUWHG
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ0DQXDO
&RPPLVVLRQLQJ0DQXDOIRU&$1RSHQ
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO'ULYH)XQFWLRQV
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO6DIHW\,QWHJUDWHG
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO'&&
/LVW0DQXDO
6,1$0,&6
6
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDOIRU&RQWURO8QLWVDQG
2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV
$GGLWLRQDO&RPSRQHQWV
/LVW0DQXDO
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDOIRU%RRNVL]H3RZHU8QLWV
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDOIRU&KDVVLV3RZHU8QLWV
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDOIRU&KDVVLV/LTXLG
&RROHG3RZHU8QLWV
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDO&DELQHW0RGXOHV
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDO$&'ULYH
0DQXIDFWXUHUVHUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,1$0,&6
0RWRUV
'2&RQ&'
&RQILJXUDWLRQ0DQXDOV
0RWRUV
(0&
&RQILJXUDWLRQ*XLGHOLQHV
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
311
Service and maintenance
Manual
312
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Index
A
Anti-condensation measures, 284
Anti-corrosion agent, 282
Autotransformer, 60
B
Basic Operator Panel BOP20, 185
Blocksize Liquid Cooled Power Modules, 104
Braking resistors in blocksize format, 127
C
Cable Installation, 255
CAN, 160
Cavitation, 280
Characteristics
Duty cycles for braking resistors in blocksize
format, 133
Duty cycles for Power Modules Blocksize, 97
Duty cycles for Power Modules blocksize liquid
cooled, 122
Communication with USS protocol, 157
Components
Basic Operator Panel BOP20, 185
Braking resistors in blocksize format, 127
Control Unit CU305 PN, 151
CU305 CAN Control Unit, 151
CU305 DP Control Unit, 151
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing, 231
DRIVE-CLiQ coupling, 235
Line reactors, 43
Motor reactors, Blocksize, 135
Power Modules PM340 blocksize, 63
Safe Brake Relay, 223
Screening Kit, 238
Control cabinet design, 251
Control Unit CU305 PN, 151
Coolant, 281
Coolant connection, 118
Coolant mix, 277
Coolant temperatures, 277
Cooling circuit, 282
Addition of biocide, 283
Antifreeze, 282
Configuring, 276
Dimensioning, 278
General requirements, 273
Materials and connections, 279
Pressure, 276
Pressure drop, 277
Cooling circuits, 273
Cooling clearances, 67, 107, 266
CU305 CAN Control Unit, 151
CU305 DP Control Unit, 151
D
Derating
For Power Modules blocksize liquid cooled, 124
Power Modules blocksize, 99
Dew point, 284
Diagnostics via LEDs
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC10, 194
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC20, 203
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 215
Dimension drawings
Blocksize line filter, 40
Blocksize line reactors, 44
Braking resistors, 129
Control Unit CU305 PN, 181
CU305 CAN Control Unit, 182
CU305 DP Control Unit, 182
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing, 232
DRIVE-CLiQ coupling, 236
Liquid Cooled Power Module PM340, 112
Motor reactors, blocksize, 136
Power Modules PM340 blocksize, 79
Power Modules with Screening Kit, frame sizes FSA
to FSF, 241
Screening Kit, frame sizes FSA to FSC, 239
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC10, 195
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC20, 204
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 216
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing, 231
DRIVE-CLiQ coupling, 235
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
313
Index
E
M
Electrical cabinet cooling, 266
Electronics power supply, 25
EMC Directive, 254
Encoder cable length, 167
Equipotential bonding, 285
ESD information, 9
Maintenance, 287
Memory card, 172
Motor reactors, Blocksize, 135
Mounting
Basic Operator Panel BOP20, 188
Control Unit CU305 PN, 183
CU305 CAN Control Unit, 183
CU305 DP Control Unit, 183
Ferrite core for size FSB/FSC, 247
Power Modules PM340 blocksize, 86
Screening kit size FSA, 245
Screening kit size FSB/FSC, 246
Screening kit size FSD/FSE liquid cooled, 249
Screening kit size FSF, 248
Screening kit size FSF liquid cooled, 249
Screening Kit, frame sizes FSD/FSE, 247
Sub-chassis components, 263
F
Foreword, 5
H
Heat dissipation, 266
Hotline, 7
I
Installation
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing, 234
DRIVE-CLiQ coupling, 237
Sensor Modules Cabinet, 195, 204, 216
Interface descriptions
Basic Operator Panel BOP20, 185
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing, 232
DRIVE-CLiQ coupling, 235
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC10, 191
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC20, 200
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 208
Interface overview
CU305 CAN, 159
CU305 DP, 156
CU305 PN, 154
Isolating transformer, 61
L
Layout of the components, 262
LEDs
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC10, 194
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC20, 203
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 215
Line connection voltage, 25
Line contactor, 37
Line filter versions, 31
Line frequency, 25
Line reactor versions, 31
Line reactors, 43
O
Option module, brake control, 223
Overcurrent, 258
Overcurrent protection, 34
P
Potential bonding, 264
Power loss, 269
Control Units, Sensor Modules, 269
Line reactors and line filters, 270
Power Modules, 271
Power Modules PM340 blocksize, 63
Power Supply Units, 261
Pulse/direction interface, 169
R
Rated pulse frequency, 25
Rated short-circuit current, 25
Reforming the DC link capacitors, 293
Repairs, 287
Replacing components, 288
Replacing the fan
PM340, 288
Residual risks, 12
Residual risks of power drive systems, 12
Residual-current-operated circuit breaker, 35
Manual
314
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
Index
S
Safe Brake Relay, 223
Safety information
Blocksize Liquid Cooled Power Modules, 105
Control cabinet design, 252
CU305 Control Unit, 153
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing, 231
DRIVE-CLiQ coupling, 235
Line filter, 39
Line reactors, 43
Motor reactors, 135
Power Modules PM340 blocksize, 65
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC10, 190
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC20, 199
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 207
Screening Kit, 238
Service and maintenance, 288
Setting the PROFIBUS address, 158
Setting the USS address, 158
Shielding, 238
Spare parts, 297
Specification of encoder systems and encoders
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 219
Spring-loaded terminals, 299
Standards, 28
Storage, 25
Support, 7
System data, 25
T
Technical data
Blocksize line filter, 42
Braking resistors in blocksize format, 132
CU305 Control Unit, 184
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet bushing, 234
DRIVE-CLiQ coupling, 237
Power Modules Blocksize, 90
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC10, 197
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC20, 206
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 219
Technical specifications
Blocksize line reactors, 55
Motor reactors, blocksize, 148
Transport, 26
Typical 24 V current consumption, 260
V
Ventilation, 267
Manual
Manual, 01/2011, 6SL3097-4AC10-0BP2
315
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Drive Technologies
Motion Control Systems
Postfach 3180
91050 ERLANGEN
GERMANY
Subject to change without prior notice
© Siemens AG 2011
www.siemens.com/motioncontrol